The Interior Designers Guide To Pricing Estimating And Budgeting

User Manual:

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 209

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

ID Guide Title Page

3/9/05

2:21 PM

Page 1

The
Interior
Designer’s
Guide
to
P R I C I N G,
E S T I M AT I N G ,
and
BUDGETING
Theo Stephan Williams

ALLWORTH PRESS
NEW YORK

(00)FM IDG Pricing, Estimating 3/8/05 12:38 PM Page ii

All rights reserved. Copyright under Berne Copyright Convention, Universal
Copyright Convention, and Pan-American Copyright Convention. No part
of this book may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in
any form, or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording,
or otherwise, without prior permission of the publisher.
09 08 07 06 05

5 4 3 2 1

Published by Allworth Press
An imprint of Allworth Communications
10 East 23rd Street, New York, NY 10010
Cover design by Derek Bacchus
Page composition/typography by SR Desktop Services, Ridge, NY
ISBN: 1-58115-403-8

Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data
Williams,Theo Stephan, 1960–
The interior designer's guide to pricing, estimating, and budgeting /
Theo Stephan Williams.
p.
cm.
Includes bibliographical references.
1. Interior decoration—Practice—Economic aspects—Handbooks,
manuals, etc. 2. Interior decoration firms—Management—
Handbooks, manuals, etc. 3. Interior decoration—Marketing—
Handbooks, manuals, etc. I. Title.
NK2116.2.W55 2005
747'.068'1—dc22
2005001838
Printed in Canada

(00)FM IDG Pricing, Estimating 3/3/05 3:03 PM Page iii

Contents
ebooksdownloadrace.blogspot.in

Acknowledgments

CHAPTER 1

Why Me?

CHAPTER 2

How to Determine Your Hourly Rate

CHAPTER 3

Compare and Contrast

CHAPTER 4

The Client’s Budget

CHAPTER 5

More on Value Rating

CHAPTER 6

Fatal Errors

CHAPTER 7

Pricing Options

CHAPTER 8

The Details on Estimates

CHAPTER 9

Proposals

(00)FM IDG Pricing, Estimating 3/3/05 3:03 PM Page iv

101

CHAPTER 10

Troubleshooting Estimates and Proposals

117

CHAPTER 11

Successfully Establishing and Managing Budgets

131

CHAPTER 12

Negotiating

143

CHAPTER 13

Positioning Your Firm

153

Appendix: Business Forms

191

Selected Bibliography

193

About the Author

195

Index

(00)FM IDG Pricing, Estimating 3/3/05 3:03 PM Page v

Acknowledgments

his book is dedicated to my dad, whose spirited love for his
own work and entrepreneurship—long before anyone knew
what that meant—paved the way for my own independence.
My mother’s endless supply of hugs and her constant
reminder to me as a young girl that I could do anything I put my
mind to are two of my greatest rewards.
A special thanks to Tad Crawford, who believed that I would
one day finish the manuscript for this book—and I finally did!

(00)FM IDG Pricing, Estimating 3/3/05 3:03 PM Page vi

(01)1-4 IDG Pricing, Estimating 3/3/05 3:05 PM Page 1

Why Me?

ou’re probably wondering why you picked up this book in
the first place. In our industry, pricing, estimating, budgeting,
and everything that revolves around those three things, are more
than a royal pain—and everyone knows it.
You’ve had the highs of that corporate client who had to get
it done and never balked once at your pricing.You didn’t even
give him a written estimate. He begged you to just give it to him
over the phone.The day of your presentation, he got so excited,
he called some of his colleagues in to show off your ideas.You
even got paid two weeks after you submitted your invoice. Now,
isn’t this how every interior design project turns out? Wrong.
Sure, it might happen every once in a while. But, realistically, this isn’t going to be the norm, even if you are one of
those design-firm names seen in every awards annual, industry
magazine, and big trade show. Even the award winners and bigname designers have to get down to basics—pricing, estimating, and budgeting.
When I started my own design business in 1983, I truly
expected the worst. I sold my car so that I wouldn’t have car payments. I paid off all of my credit cards before quitting my job in
anticipation of not being able to make minimum monthly payments. I even went so far as to lie to my parents, telling them that
I had gotten laid off so they would feel sorry for me and lend
me money if I couldn’t scrape up enough work to feed myself.
I moved a twin bed into my bedroom to allow room for a desk,
drafting table (this was in the prehistoric pre-computer days),
and supplies; a two-bedroom apartment just would have been
too expensive.
Well, doomsday never arrived. In fact, business was so good
that after two short months of paying towing bills due to my
“new” used car’s constant breakdowns, I bought a new car. My
zero-balance credit cards were once again activated, to the

The Interior Designer’s Guide to P RICING, E STIMATING, and B UDGETING

■

(01)1-4 IDG Pricing, Estimating 3/3/05 3:05 PM Page 2

delight of my wardrobe. Exactly one year after breaking free from the
entanglements of the corporate ball-and-chain, I bought my own
home and created a comfortable studio space to welcome clients and
vendors. And I did it all with profit.You can profit too, by establishing
guidelines and simple disciplines for yourself that will soon begin
ticking like clockwork.
Profit—you’ve got to have it to survive. Sure, you can get by for a
while breaking even on jobs. But it won’t be long before you burn out,
shrivel up, and change careers. Interior design can and should be a
lucrative industry. Just how profitable you are depends on the basics:
What are your rates? Are your estimates comprehensive yet concise?
Do you have an efficient method of project management? This book
will help you answer these questions and give you ways to accomplish
the feat of profitability.
Profiting from your interior design business is essential not only for
you but also for the entire industry. There are three reasons your business can fail: 1) You don’t have enough sales, 2) You are not charging
enough for your services, or 3) You are mismanaging budgets.You are
doing a great disservice not only to yourself but also to your colleagues
across the nation by not charging your clients enough money for your
work in order to be profitable.
Why you? Because you love being an interior designer, you want to
be successful, and you know that to achieve the ultimate successes of it
all, you’ve got to be a savvy businessperson.And if you’re not the master
of the issues detailed in this book, you can forget any business dreams in
interior design . . . I hear there’s a burger joint down the street looking
for a few good flippers!

The Quintessential Rose-Colored Glasses
I can promise you that the three hardest things you’ll ever do in the
business of interior design is figure out how much to charge for your
services, how to do an estimate, and how to manage project budgets
completely and efficiently. We designers tend to walk around wearing
rose-colored glasses, sporting the latest in designer frames, and never
even thinking about how much we should charge for our work. Why
should we? Our work is cool, and getting into colors and textures is so
much fun—someone will pay for it.
There is a stigma in the design world surrounding money issues.
Having to deal with them can seem worse than anything you have ever
imagined for yourself. But wait! It’s not so bad—really! You can even
delegate a lot of it.The truth of the matter is that once you find out how

(01)1-4 IDG Pricing, Estimating 3/3/05 3:05 PM Page 3

W HY M E ?

to successfully perform the tasks of pricing, estimating, and managing
budgets, you’ll probably want to perform them yourself. There is no
greater feeling than taking complete ownership of a project—and that
means administratively as well as creatively.
This book is written by the ultimate wearer of those aforementioned
rose-colored glasses. So it’s really true—you can have your rosy glasses
and your financial acumen, too. Once you are the master of your
pricing, budgeting, and estimating destiny, others will want to talk to
you about it, they’ll want you to lecture at design conferences, even
write books. Because, you see, we’re all so afraid of the subject.
At a recent international design conference, I, along with almost two
thousand other designers, sat in a packed conference room listening to
three top-notch design-firm owners discuss “the business of interior
design.” They all showed their work and discussed, in panel style, how
they had obtained the projects and what types of awards they eventually
won with them. I found myself getting agitated, because this wasn’t
about “business” at all.
Finally, during the Q&A, an astute designer in the audience asked my
favorite guy up there (a popular speaker at these conventions), “How
much did you charge for the XYZ [not its real name] museum project?”
Well, ladies and gentlemen, my favorite Mr. Guru blew it big time. He
stuttered and faltered, and from the fortieth row I saw those telltale signs
of stress bead onto his forehead. His answer was that “it was proprietary
information.” We were all there in that room to learn about the business, and this guy let two thousand people down. During the conference the same person who had asked the question happened to be in
my pricing seminar. I had hoped she would be. I answered her question.
Of course, I didn’t know for sure how much my colleague had charged
his client . . . but I knew how much he should have charged.
I believe that I can draw a pretty unanimous conclusion about interior designers. I have interviewed over a hundred design-firm owners
for various articles, books, and other projects, and if my Mr. Guru is any
example—as the other interviewees were—we all like making money.
We like to spend money.We like to have nice living spaces that look like
a photographer could come in at a moment’s notice and take a shot for
a home interiors magazine. We like nice clothes and we wear trendy
(rose-colored optional) glasses.
But another unanimous conclusion to make is that we don’t like
managing and pricing the projects we are lucky enough to obtain. And
yet it is absolutely necessary to have a systematic and fearless approach
to these tasks. The solution is in these pages. You will find different

■

The Interior Designer’s Guide to P RICING, E STIMATING, and B UDGETING

■

(01)1-4 IDG Pricing, Estimating 3/3/05 3:05 PM Page 4

types of forms, checklists, and tips prescribed from a compilation of
ongoing research over the course of my twenty-one-plus years of
owning a design business.
Use the appendix of this book as a detailed reference for suggested
forms that will help you achieve organizational and administrative efficiency.You will find specific types of forms, such as invoices, estimates,
and time sheets, and discover those pages that contain the information
you want to study and modify for your own use. This appendix was
written by Tad Crawford, author of Business and Legal Forms for Interior
Designers. That book contains more substantive, specific forms and
includes ready-to-use formats on CD-ROM for your use and personal
enhancement (see the selected bibliography).
So, lighten up about the money issues already. Relax, sit back, and
enjoy the fruits of your labor even more by learning about new ways to
price, estimate, and manage the plethora of projects that are cascading in
your direction. Equip yourself now with a highlighter or notepad to
create an edited version of this book for your future reference.

Making Your Mark
Your decision about how much to charge for the services you provide
is a most significant one. Establishing rates presents many challenges and
raises many questions:What is the economy like in your area? What are
the average rates now being charged for the services you will provide?
Do you want to be on the low end, high end, or in the middle?
Ultimately, you will want to set a price that’s high enough to cover your
expenses and earn you a profit, and low enough to be competitive for
the work you do.
Always think about pricing in direct connection with profit—they
really do go hand in hand.Also, be business-minded when you approach
this decision. Study your individual situation using the guidelines provided in this chapter. Establish your pricing with self-confidence, and
know that this is one area of your business that deserves a little science,
math, and introspection. I promise, it’s not as hard as you think.
You’ve heard words like overhead and profit a million times, but when
you personally decide to go solo—either by freelancing, setting up a
small studio, or hiring a staff—suddenly, these words fall squarely from
the skies above onto your vulnerable shoulders.Wouldn’t it be easier if
you could look up, see the words coming down, and catch them with
ease as they fell your way? Now you can!
Overhead is defined in Webster’s as “of or pertaining to the operating
expenses of a business concern.” Many designers refer to it as a myste-

(01)1-4 IDG Pricing, Estimating 3/3/05 3:05 PM Page 5

rious journey into the unknown. Fortunately, you’re not one of those
designers. Just being aware of the existence of overhead is enough to get
you started thinking a bit differently. Overhead is truly something to
embrace with understanding and openness—not to run from in fright
or denial. It is the difference between knowing whether you are able to
afford the huge loft studio that perfectly reflects the city’s colors beneath
you or the small-but-quaint efficiency office with no windows and a
copy machine down the hall. More importantly, understanding your
own overhead will help you immensely in establishing correct pricing,
estimating, and projecting budgets that will make you more profitable!
Making your mark means setting your course, understanding your
process and your personal motivations. Maybe money isn’t your
number-one goal . . . it seldom is for interior designers. Just know that,
in order to maintain a strong professional status in not only your community but also in the global design community, you must develop a
process for your business. I hate to use terms like system and business culture, because most people will tell me, “Look, I started my own firm so
I wouldn’t have to follow any rules or have any corporate culture.”
My reply is, “Good luck.”Why not create your own unique corporate culture instead?

Understanding Some Accounting Terms

W HY M E ?

Do yourself a magnanimous favor right now and learn some basic
accounting terms.You should have a tax accountant do your taxes for
you; if you have employees, you should have a certified public
accountant (CPA) or full-service accounting firm helping you. Take
your accountant to lunch. Boring? No. For the mere price of a plate of
chicken lo mein or pesto vegetarian pizza, your accountant would love
to coach you on the basics . . . and the basics are all you need.Words like
overhead, assets, liabilities, credits, debits, and depreciation are all important for
your knowledge bank.You may understand what they mean generally,
but learn to apply their meaning directly to your business.
Use the list provided on page 7 as a guide to learning your own
overhead. Notice that the list is split into two categories: fixed and
unfixed (or variable) expenses. No, this is not Accounting 101. It’s plain
and simple list making, which is virtually foolproof. It will be easier for
you to complete these lists by determining monthly cost figures and
then multiplying by twelve to obtain an annual figure.
Fixed expenses are just that—expenses that are the same every
month, like rent and equipment loan payments. Remember that when
you buy a new car or update to the latest in computer technology, your

■

The Interior Designer’s Guide to P RICING, E STIMATING, and B UDGETING

■

(01)1-4 IDG Pricing, Estimating 3/3/05 3:05 PM Page 6

fixed list will change—and your pricing may need to reflect the new
rise in overhead. The total of your monthly fixed-expenses list is the
amount of gross revenue (income) that you need to generate in order
to break even.
As you are preparing your fixed list, other items will quickly come
to mind that belong in your unfixed-expenses list (it’s like playing word
association). Begin a separate column for unfixed items while you make
your fixed list, because you will need both lists when you are figuring
your ideal hourly rate. (More of this is covered in chapter 2.)
Your unfixed list will include expenditures that fluctuate monthly,
like temporary subcontractors and delivery services. Most of your
unfixed expenses will directly correlate to how busy you are during a
given period.The unfixed list is somewhat of a challenge because it is
not consistent like your fixed list. If you are just starting your business,
call some typical subcontractors you are interested in using and ask
them to help you establish a monthly average by comparing accounts
that resemble your own potential usage. After you get a few months of
business under your belt, you will be more knowledgeable about what
to expect from your unfixed category. Many unfixed costs come as
startling surprises that, if left off your list, will certainly end up costing
you money.
Assessing the reality of your fixed and unfixed lists is the absolute
cornerstone of your business.Take the time to review these lists with a
fresh mind a day or two after you complete them. If possible, share
them with a mentor or colleague to make sure you haven’t forgotten
anything that may not be listed in the guide provided (like snow
removal from your parking space if you live in Minneapolis, for
example). These expenses are your foundation for determining a fee
structure that will work positively for your individual business needs.
Review this list twice a year (mark your calendar to remind yourself ),
because as your business grows or changes, this list will need to be
adjusted accordingly.The outcome of this list making will be a clearer
picture of the level of income you need to generate, not only to break
even but to live on as well.

(01)1-4 IDG Pricing, Estimating 3/3/05 3:05 PM Page 7

Fixed Expenses

Unfixed Expenses

Salaries
Studio Rent
Studio Insurance
Workers’ Comp Insurance
(requirements vary by state)
Car Payment/Maintenance
Health Insurance
Equipment Loan/Lease Payment
Business Contents Insurance
Accounting Fees
Telephone Bill
Heating Bill
Electric Bill
Professional Industry Dues
Subscriptions to Trade Publications
Payroll Taxes
City/State Taxes
Social Security (FICA)
Personal Property Taxes

Freelance Help
Subcontractor Fees
Customer Delivery and/or
Setup Fees
Professional Education
Presentation/Art Supplies
Photography Fees (for beforeand-after shots)
Travel
Meals/Entertainment
Office Supplies
Resource Material
Postage
Delivery Services
Sales Taxes
Self-Promotion
Bank Charges
Legal Fees
Printing Costs
Color Separations Costs
Maintenance/Repairs

W HY M E ?

Don’t let the various tax items listed above send you over the edge.
Instead, pay a tax accountant a small monthly fee (your accountant’s
monthly fee is already on your fixed list) to monitor these tax issues and
prepare your tax forms for you.
Now, take a break from the list making and begin a quest to define
an income for yourself. Be objective with your ego in determining what
you think you are worth from a salary standpoint. Face the facts of your
geographical environment. Are freelancers a dime a dozen in your area?
Are you establishing a small firm with employees? Are you a consistent
award-winning designer in your region or a relatively unknown and
inexperienced entrepreneur? Most of us begin working in this industry
as the latter—skilled and eager, yet basically lacking in business expertise
and awards on the wall. That’s okay. Use this to your advantage; the
payoff is in the big picture.

■

The Interior Designer’s Guide to P RICING, E STIMATING, and B UDGETING

■

(01)1-4 IDG Pricing, Estimating 3/3/05 3:05 PM Page 8

It’s time to fully assess your fixed list. Make certain that all expenditures that remain the same from month to month are included.Total
your monthly expenditures and multiply by twelve to obtain a yearly
figure. Now, add your desired, objective salary amount. If you are
having difficulty establishing this amount, begin with the average salary
for interior designers in your region; obviously, if you have years of
experience as a designer, your salary should be commensurate with
your experience. Web sites such as Monster.com and the U.S. Bureau
of Labor Statistics (www.bls.gov/bls/blswage.htm) can help you with some
current figures.
The grand total of your annual fixed list (expense) dollars plus your
desired salary is the income you need to generate from the services portion of your business. Unfixed expenses are usually directly attributable
to your projects. That list will be used to help you determine appropriate rates to cover those variable expenses.

Burn Out or Burn On
There’s nothing like starting a new business, and motoring along on the
latest razor scooter of a dynamite project that you can’t believe you
landed. This baby is huge! They even gave you the budget.You’ll make
so much money you don’t even need an hourly rate; they never asked.
You go buy the latest computer, the latest handheld PDA, the coolest
sound system, and an Armani suit for the presentation.You’re flying high
for sure. So, the big job gets done, and it’s a beauty, and then you’re back
to Mr. Client, who nickels and dimes you until you feel like day-old
toast.The bills pile up. Maybe your credit card company calls you to see
if you’ve forgotten this month’s payment.You’ll be lucky if you can pay
it next month.
Don’t burn out this way; there is simply no excuse for it. Learning
how to determine the right hourly rate—and sticking to it consistently—will get you through the toaster and back out into the “fresh
today” section.
Obviously, the higher your overhead, the higher your rates will be.
But this doesn’t mean that you can increase your prices every time you
purchase a new piece of equipment or hire a new staff member. First,
I’d like to share some of my experiences and thoughts on how to view
those big expenses—like salaries and rent. In the next chapter, I’ll give
you a couple of really good formulas for setting your own hourly rates.
Recently, I saw my profits go up by hiring a summer intern from the
local university. (To see the relative importance of this move, keep in
mind that salaries are going to be your single biggest expense, unless you

(01)1-4 IDG Pricing, Estimating 3/3/05 3:05 PM Page 9

W HY M E ?

are working strictly on your own. Note my list of fixed expenses on
page 7. Prior to hiring this intern, I had been paying $50 to $75 per
hour for freelance help that always seemed problematic; we were using
a good freelancer, but our client was quite particular about many quirky
little things. Without having the freelancer at our beck and call all day
long, we found ourselves spending a substantial amount of time correcting work that she had accomplished. Having a summer intern in our
office meant that we paid him much less than a full-time designer, plus
other staff saved the time because he was more available to fix or
change his work.We saved money and he got some fantastic projects for
his portfolio!
Something else that goes hand in hand with determining your rates
is your studio or office rent—another fixed expense. Working from
home keeps this figure low, but it can quickly drive you crazy, with the
distractions created by the neighbor’s barking dog and your mom who
calls to chat every day because she knows you’re “home.” On the other
hand, a more elaborate studio space comes with a high monthly price
tag and its own set of utility and maintenance bills.
Since your rent will be one of your biggest single expenses after
salaries and taxes, you might think that finding a cheap workspace will
keep your rates down substantially. But in the overall scheme of things,
it doesn’t improve your rates by more than a few dollars an hour.You
can easily prove this by plugging different rental amounts into your fixed
list as you use the master formula given on page 13.
The U.S. Bureau of Labor Statistics publishes salary rates and averages by geographic location, updated every four years. More detailed
data on the survey instrument itself and the composition of respondents
is available on its Web site. Doing a recent keyword search for “interior
designers salaries” resulted in over 32,000 hits, with the first three Web
pages containing pertinent information. You can also get information
from your local chamber of commerce, job-placement services, or university-degree program offices specializing in interior design.
The American Society of Interior Designers (ASID), the largest and
oldest professional organization for interior designers, shares a plethora
of information on salaries, including benefit information ranging from
costs for typical medical coverage, types of retirement plans offered,
retirement plan contribution statistics, opportunities for group coverage,
networking, and much, much more (visit their Web site at www.asid.org).

■

(01)1-4 IDG Pricing, Estimating 3/3/05 3:05 PM Page 10

(01)1-4 IDG Pricing, Estimating 3/3/05 3:05 PM Page 11

How to Determine
Your Hourly Rate

efore getting into the actual processes of determining rates,
you will need to make some important decisions regarding
whether or not you should be an interior-design business owner.

Things to Consider Before Starting
Out on Your Own
■
■
■
■

■

■
■

Do you crave independence and a lack of routine?
Are you self-motivated?
Do you like to take risks?
Do you enjoy talking about your work and “selling” your
portfolio and history of completed projects?
Do you want to freelance for other firms or architects?
If not, do you have enough contacts who could support
your endeavors by hiring you directly?
Do you like wearing different hats?
Are you generally optimistic and outgoing?

If some of the above questions are difficult to answer affirmatively, think twice about striking out on your own just yet.Take
part in some small-business workshops and start searching for a
mentor or two who can help you decide when the time is right.
Assuming you feel good about the last set of questions you
answered, move to this next set to determine if your strengths
will lie in going it alone as a freelancer or establishing yourself as
a full-service firm.

Do You Want to Be Full Service?
■
■
■

Do you like being completely in charge?
Are you a team player?
Do you enjoy doing many things at one time?

The Interior Designer’s Guide to P RICING, E STIMATING, and B UDGETING

■

(01)1-4 IDG Pricing, Estimating 3/3/05 3:05 PM Page 12

■

■
■
■
■
■
■

Do you have an extensive knowledge of not only interior design
but also rough and finished construction and the actual craft of
painting?
Do you enjoy sourcing contractors?
Do you like troubleshooting?
Are you familiar with several respected copywriters?
Do you feel comfortable with spelling, grammar, and punctuation?
Do you like to negotiate?
Do you like to establish schedules for different people and follow
through with them?

Answer yes to at least eight of the above ten questions and you can
count yourself a great candidate for supplying full service to your
clients. Six or seven positive responses will find you a great freelance
candidate, but as a full-service supplier you might have some serious
challenges ahead.Any questions having a no answer should be looked at
as deficiencies and corrected to a yes answer as soon as possible if you
want to survive in the fun, yet challenging, full-service market.
Any fewer than six yes answers—forget it! Sorry.

Pricing
Now you’re ready to pick the right pricing formula for your business.
After getting through this chapter, don’t stop reading the book and
think you know it all. There are some great pricing options in chapter
7 that you will refer to—and use—often. The important thing to
remember is that no one formula is perfect for every project. This is a
starting point. Often, pricing for projects is determined by your flexibility and your knowledge of different approaches to pricing.And don’t
forget the most important part of this: profitability!
Many formulas exist to assist you in establishing an hourly rate.The
simplest formula is to multiply all the salaries you’re paying out—don’t
forget to include your own—by three.The theory here is that one-third
of your expenses represents the actual outlay of salaries, one-third represents the overhead, and the final one-third is left over for profit. Pretty
easy, huh? Actually, the smaller you are—and especially if your studio is
in your home—the better this down-and-dirty formula can work.

The Master Formula
A much better and more comprehensive formula follows. Albeit more
complex, it works a lot more efficiently and makes more sense logistically

(01)1-4 IDG Pricing, Estimating 3/3/05 3:05 PM Page 13

as you are computing it. So, get some paper, a calculator, and a pencil with
an eraser, and you’ll have the perfect hourly rate in less than fifteen minutes.
Remember the fixed list? You’ll need this detailed list of all your
fixed expenses for its important totals. I’m using the following example
for matters of simplicity.
THE BEST DESIGN FIRM, INC.
Annual Fixed Costs List

Salaries (owner + three people—
one senior designer, one junior designer,
one administrative assistant)
Studio Rent and Maintenance
Company Car—Maintenance and Insurance
Health Insurance
Equipment Loan/Lease Payments
Business Insurance
Accounting Fees
Telephone
Heating/Air Conditioning
Electricity
Dues/Subscriptions/Awards Entry Fees
Payroll Taxes, City/State Taxes,
Social Security Taxes (FICA)
[Multiply total salaries by .25 (25 percent)]
Personal Property Taxes

$188,000
37,000
8,100
6,480
6,000
1,200
4,000
2,200
2,400
1,000
2,500

Grand Total

47,000
2,000
$307,880
H OW to D ETERMINE YOUR H OURLY R ATE

Now, look realistically at the total billable hours you can obtain from
your salaried staff. First, we’ll divide your total salaries by those billable
hours, and that will give you a rate to charge just to cover salaries. Next,
we’ll add a percentage based on the rest of your expenses to cover overhead. Finally, we’ll add a percentage so that the business itself can actually make a profit for all this work.
Billable hours are simply those hours that you can directly bill to a
client. Nonbillable hours reflect time that cannot be attributed to any
specific client’s job. These are hours spent on general things like
cleaning up, backing up your computer, or peeling bananas. My office
manager/receptionist often performs nonbillable tasks—answering the
telephone, ordering supplies, general accounting tasks, etc. Her hours
are mostly nonbillable.

■

The Interior Designer’s Guide to P RICING, E STIMATING, and B UDGETING

■

(01)1-4 IDG Pricing, Estimating 3/3/05 3:05 PM Page 14

So, out of a total year’s worth of hours for four people—52 weeks x
40 hours x 4 people = 8,320 hours—suddenly, The Best Design Firm,
Inc., needs to deduct 2,080 hours for their office manager/receptionist.
That leaves them three billable people and 6,240 hours. Everybody gets
two weeks vacation, so three billable people times eighty hours subtracts
240 hours from the company’s total. Typically, allow five days for each
person to have as sick days or personal days off, so that’s another 120
hours. I give my staff one week of paid vacation as part of their holiday
bonus between Christmas and New Year’s. If The Best Design Firm
wants to offer this bonus, subtract another 120 hours. Don’t forget our
seven legal holidays—it’s typical (due to the incredible deadline and
burnout associated with the industry) to extend these into an additional
day off for four-day weekends—so 14 days x 8 hours x 3 billable people
is another 336 hours to subtract.The subtotal currently stands at 5,424
billable annual hours.
Last but not least, no designer is in any way billable for an actual
forty hours per week. Time-consuming tasks such as surfing the
Internet on company time (!?), cleaning up for that important client
visit, running errands, and backing up your system can quickly add up
to about an hour a day per billable person.That’s a painful subtraction
of 690 hours of downtime (five hours per week per billable person for
forty-six total weeks of actual work) for a realistic grand total of just
4,734 possible billable work hours.That’s if everything runs smoothly all
the time.
Now, add the total salaries and related tax expenditures, for a total of
$235,000, divide by 4,734 possible billable hours, and get an hourly rate
of $49.64. For the sake of simplicity, let’s round that figure up to $50 per
hour. But remember, this rate does not yet include total overhead. So
far, you’ve only covered the salaries portion of the fixed expenses list.
To determine what percentage to add to cover your other fixed
expenses, divide their total by the total salary and taxes amount. In The
Best Design Firm’s case, the total fixed expenses ($307,880) minus salary
and taxes ($235,000) leaves remaining expenses of $72,880. This
remaining amount, $72,880, divided by the salary and taxes amount of
$235,000 equals 31.02 percent.
Again, we’ll just round this off and make it 31 percent. (Okay, okay,
this is a bit like algebra, but at least I’m giving you the answers—just fill
in the blanks with your own totals, and you’ll get your percentage.)
Now, take the hourly rate that you computed to cover salaries (in The
Best Design Firm’s case, $50 per hour) and multiply it by the percentage
you’ve just established to cover your overhead (in this case, 31 percent).

(01)1-4 IDG Pricing, Estimating 3/3/05 3:05 PM Page 15

H OW to D ETERMINE YOUR H OURLY R ATE
■

The $50 hourly rate multiplied by 31 percent equals an additional
$15.50 per hour Best needs to charge to break even on additional
fixed annual expenses. So, $50 per hour to cover salaries plus $15.50
to cover all those other expenses establishes that The Best Design Firm
needs to charge at least $65.50 per hour (let’s just say $66) to break even
on everything.
For you algebra whizzes out there, sure, you can arrive at your
hourly rate simply by taking your total overhead number—in The Best
Design Firm’s case, $307,880—and dividing it by total billable hours for
a quick hourly rate. It comes out the same, right? Correct, but it is very
important as you grow to know what percentage of your business overhead is salary-based versus other fixed expenses. It is typical for salary
overhead to be about 50 percent of total fixed costs.
You might think that making a profit over and above your total fixed
expenses is simply icing on the cake: nice, but not really necessary. If so,
you’re not alone. A lot of people think that everything left over at the
end of these calculations is theirs to keep. Don’t make that grave mistake of not having anything left over for a rainy day or to cover the
occasional slow-paying client. Small businesses close their doors every
day because of these far-too-frequent dilemmas.
Remember, we’ve made no allowances here for slow periods, downtime, equipment failure, scheduled pay raises, or the kind gesture of distributing bonuses for jobs well done. Peruse the contents of your
unfixed expenses list. Costs for things like postage, maintenance, and
education (design conventions and furniture shows are wonderful) that
are seldom attributable to a particular job need to come from somewhere—your bottom line.You could easily go in the hole if your hourly
rates are not bumped up enough to cover these variables.
A common percentage of profit in the industry begins at 15 percent
and can go up to 25 percent; I average about 19 percent.Adding 19 percent to The Best Design Firm’s $66 hourly rate equals an additional $13,
making their base rate $79 per hour. (I actually charge up to $250 per
hour for certain tasks, which will be discussed later in this chapter.)
Enough already with the calculator! Just remember one thing: The
hourly rate that you originally established (before adding a profitability
percentage) covers only the itemized subjects on your overhead lists.
Each job you produce will have contingencies that you must not forget
to include in your budget planning and estimating execution. Details do
matter; every day, every project is different.
There are other formulas to determine hourly rates, of course. I find
this particular formula the most comprehensive, reliable, and easiest to

The Interior Designer’s Guide to P RICING, E STIMATING, and B UDGETING

■

(01)1-4 IDG Pricing, Estimating 3/3/05 3:05 PM Page 16

compute. Your average hourly rate should remain very close to your
base rate—The Best Design Firm’s being $79 per hour. Once this base
rate has been established, it’s easy to go in and refine it or to try other
rate methods.
Hourly rates reflect not only the end product that a client receives,
but also the years of experience, skills, and intuitive talent that a creative
team offers. Ultimately, your clients expect and deserve an enhancement
to their image, offering ergonomics, integrity, and functionality.
Interestingly enough, and to my surprise, the geographic locations of
design firms I have interviewed in the past did not have a great effect
on hourly rates. I thought New York City or San Francisco rates would
certainly be higher, but found that not to be true at all. Rather, rates
changed according to the size and experience level of the firm and the
success and notoriety level of the principal.
Having originally founded a graphic design firm in the early
eighties, I relied on that industry’s Handbook of Pricing and Ethical
Guidelines published by the Graphic Artists Guild for help in establishing
rates; an updated edition is published every two years or so.This handbook, while focusing on graphic design, does contain valuable business
management tips and current discussions of ethical issues that face the
design industry in general. Use it like a recipe book—you may need to
change some of the “ingredients” (such as the graphic design terminology) to make it suit your personal taste—but there is a plethora of
insightful information for interior designers. Plus, it will give you good
information regarding many aspects of design that will cross over into
many of your projects, such as environmental graphics, signage design,
illustration, and photography.

Per-Task Hourly Rates
Not to complicate things further, but it is common for many firms to
use their base rate to establish per-task hourly rates. This simply means
that for research time or time spent entering data into the computer a
typical charge might be only $40 per hour, while actual design and presentation time are billed starting at $125 per hour. A principal might bill
at $250 per hour.
Determining per-task rates is essential when a one- or two-person
studio grows into a multiperson firm.This rating process enhances the
billable efficiency of senior people within the firm; it provides for
their not doing menial tasks when they could be more profitable and
better appreciated doing something that reflects their experience level
and strengths.

(01)1-4 IDG Pricing, Estimating 3/3/05 3:05 PM Page 17

Check out the per-task rate list I have provided from my textile
design business. Notice that the tasks requiring more technical experience are billed out at higher hourly fees. Also note that these rates were
established to be used as a comparison factor when pricing certain taskheavy projects—for example, multiple space designs for a large home or
commercial entity. First, I usually price a project using the master formula’s hourly rate. I then check that result against our per-task hourly
rates to help us refine our estimates. The following rates are beginning
rates. Depending on the style of design required, the research necessitated, travel, and overall scope of the project size, the rates may go higher
than those shown.
T’S TEXTILES
Per-Task Hourly Rates

Meeting time
Research
Design
Illustration
Travel
Documentation
Installation
Quality Control
Revisions
Clerical
Client Service
Proposal Prep (commercial only)

$85
$85
$250
$125
$500/day
$85
$85
$85
$85
$85
$85
$85

■

While design firms have an established base hourly rate, most of us also
put a great deal of emphasis on “value” rating.Value rating means that
after you determine how much time an assignment will take to design
and produce and multiply that time factor by your hourly rate to get a
project total, you objectively think about what the project itself is actually worth.
A great example of this is with custom carpet design. Some design
solutions come to me in a flash, while others seem to drone on into
oblivion. Many times I’ve sat down and literally designed a carpet in an
hour’s time, and a custom carpet design is worth far more than $250,
right? If I billed a Fortune 500 company $250 for a custom carpet

H OW to D ETERMINE YOUR H OURLY R ATE

Value Rating Versus Hourly Rate

The Interior Designer’s Guide to P RICING, E STIMATING, and B UDGETING

■

(01)1-4 IDG Pricing, Estimating 3/3/05 3:05 PM Page 18

design, the client would 1) expect to get original designs any time for
that mere pittance; 2) have no idea where I am coming from when my
next bill charges them $2,500 to simply reformat the design to a new
dimension or color palette; and 3) begin a downhill slide of losing
respect for me, because any designer who has a twenty-plus-year history
would be selling herself and her colleagues short by offering to take on
such a significant project for such a minimal fee.
So what is a customized design worth? Well, you can check the competition, price things on the Internet, and look at high-end designs
being produced in limited edition, for a start. But the most important
thing any of this will not tell you is what the project is worth to you.
Maybe the client is an energetic entrepreneur who is fun to work
with and is giving me carte blanche on design. In this case, I can’t charge
him $5,000 for a foyer carpet design, but I can charge him a minimal
amount, do a great award-winning design, and agree that I will be paid
an additional $1,000 per quarter for a year after the company gets on its
feet. Or I might agree to be more fairly compensated for future customized textile pieces that the company will require in its growth
mode.This is value rating.
On the other hand, if a huge Fortune 500 company asks me to design
a corporate collection of textiles, from the executive offices all the way
down to their retail store applications, I am obligated to first discuss the

Resources for Help in Establishing Rates
The following organizations can help you research and establish rates
and assess the competition in your local market:
■

■

American Society for Interior Designers (ASID), www.asid.org, represents the interests of more than 30,000 members including interior
design practitioners, students, and industry and retail partners.
Interior Design Society (IDS), www.interiordesignsociety.org,
an affiliate organization of the National Home Furnishings
Association, is a guiding force for professional residential designers
and design-oriented retailers.
Your local American Marketing Association (AMA) chapter,
www.ama.org. AMA National address: 250 South Wacker Drive,
Suite 200, Chicago, IL 60606-5819.

(01)1-4 IDG Pricing, Estimating 3/3/05 3:05 PM Page 19

budget constraints directly with my client, and then take a quiet moment
in my studio to look at the value this immense project will bring. With
the scope of the project in mind and an idea of the client’s budget expectations (if they have been shared with me) it is easier to assess for myself
what projects are worth to me and any of my subcontractors.
This pricing method is also great when a client is gaining a benefit
far beyond what a normal hourly rate would reflect. For example, an
original design for a new carpet I recently designed and developed for
a high-end client took my office/production team and me a combined
hourly total of 136 hours to create, present, and execute. One hundred
thirty six hours at The Best Design Firm’s hourly rate of $79 would only
equal $10,744 for this significant project, which is actually valued at
around $25,000. Plus, value pricing not only allows me to be flexible
with people I want to work with, it also allows me to triple my normal
rates when I perceive that a client will be difficult to work with.
Chapter 5 goes into more detail about value rating and what it can
and can’t do for you. And don’t forget to check out chapter 7 for more
great pricing options.

Residential Versus Commercial
Typically, it’s a smart move to choose your niche—residential versus
commercial. But when you are starting out you might want to do a bit

■

Memberships in any or all of the above organizations offer many additional benefits. All of these groups offer newsletters and Web sites that
share vital business information and tips regarding the topics in this book,
as well as hundreds of other business issues that will become increasingly
important to you. If you have trouble finding any of these organizations
in your area, ask your colleagues. Some regional chapters of the above
organizations are located only in larger metropolitan areas but would be
glad to include you on their mailing list if you are out of range.

H OW to D ETERMINE YOUR H OURLY R ATE

Your local Chamber of Commerce, www.chamberofcommerce.org.
In many regions, the local chamber of commerce goes by a name
that connotes their services. In Cleveland, for example, the
chamber of commerce is called the Greater Cleveland Growth
Association.

■

The Interior Designer’s Guide to P RICING, E STIMATING, and B UDGETING

■

(01)1-4 IDG Pricing, Estimating 3/3/05 3:05 PM Page 20

of both to test the synergy you have with either type of client (or
neither!). A colleague of mine was a very well known residential interior designer in south-central Ohio. She and her partner seemed to own
the entire high-end clientele of the region.Then, seemingly overnight,
they split up; she is now independent, working solely with an administrative assistant, specializing in large commercial buildings. She never,
ever, let anyone talk her down on price. She was known as being “expensive but great.”
Making a start where you have the most contacts is the perfect
approach to creating cash flow and profitability. Just don’t make the mistake of starting out “cheap” to get the work.Your pricing should reflect
one of the structures we have reviewed so far whether or not you are
producing design solutions for residential or commercial clients—or else
you will be selling yourself short and rising to the top of the disappointment pyramid. Never tell clients they are your “first customer.”
Always ask for their budget and determine whether or not you can
make it work within a value-pricing structure. If the budget is not
shared with you, or you are asked to develop one for the client, be forever persevering not to sell yourself short. Using this practice of pricing,
you will win in the not-too-distant future, much sooner than you think.

(01)1-4 IDG Pricing, Estimating 3/3/05 3:05 PM Page 21

Compare and Contrast

ou’ve read the formulas and some other procedures for
establishing pricing. How close are you now to establishing
your own rates? An important question you have hopefully
answered for yourself at this point is whether you want to be
known as a freelancer, a one- or two-person small studio, or a
full-service interior design firm. The services you provide and
the number of staff people you have to provide those services
greatly affects the way you will value upcoming projects.

What’s Right for You?
A one- to two-person studio typically services its own accounts.
Some are full-service, and some aren’t. Ongoing client lists are
usually very short with studios of this size, and they generally
produce a lot of one-time projects.
Being a design firm basically means that you have some sort of
staff—a group of people who support your efforts in one way or
another. Team players in a design firm generally include the
owner, who acts as the lead creative principal, at least one or two
designers, and an office manager. Larger design firms have
account representatives, administrative assistants who handle
everything from bookkeeping to scheduling subcontractors, a
graphic designer for presentations, purchasing managers, installation experts, many designers, quality control personnel, and
often more than one owner.
Freelancing quite simply means that you work on an “asneeded” basis for other design firms or large corporate interior
design departments. Basically, you are a can-do-it individual and
end up filling in during a company’s busiest periods or when
their own designers are on vacation or out ill. Many freelancers
specialize in a few niches or styles so that their work becomes
recognizable, and thus popular, in a particular region. Freelancers
often work in-house at a particular agency or design firm. The

The Interior Designer’s Guide to P RICING, E STIMATING, and B UDGETING

■

(01)1-4 IDG Pricing, Estimating 3/3/05 3:05 PM Page 22

latest trend is for freelancers to work from their own home offices, since
many times their employer won’t have extra equipment on hand for
them to use. Increasingly popular is the capability for freelancers to post
their progress on a job on the Internet for a client to review, either
directly onto a Web site or by using a file transfer protocol (FTP).This
saves a lot of driving time in larger cities and meeting time in general.
The next big question you’ve answered by now is whether or not
you want to offer full service. It’s like going to the soft-touch car wash:
Do you want only the outside of your car washed? Maybe add the
wheel cleaner and the rust-inhibiting underspray? Or do you want the
works, including the deluxe vacuum, special rain-repelling coating, and
the squirt of fragrance that will always remind you of sipping piña
coladas in Bora-Bora?
Full service can be accomplished best when you have established
yourself with a credible client list and portfolio. Many smaller studios
still can provide a wide range—yet not full—set of services. It is almost
always impossible for freelancers to be full service because they typically
don’t have established credit with subcontractors, manufacturers, or suppliers, nor do they want to handle the paperwork and responsibilities (or
the substantial amount of coordination) required.
Full service means that you are responsible not only for the interior
design itself, but also resourcing all of the finished fixtures and subcontractors who will install furniture, lighting, flooring, environmental
graphics, signage, etc. Realistically, you and your staff cannot personally
fulfill all of these obligations (how many design firms do you know that
build furniture and manufacture lighting?), but your expertise in coordinating all the details of a project is paid for by your client.
When determining value rating and per-task rating, full-service
firms have a longer list of extras that they are able to provide to their
clients and can be reimbursed accordingly for those assets. Full-service
firms charge a higher rate for their projects because they are providing
more services. Most of the time, this rate is reflected in the estimate as
charges for the various itemized services.A higher percentage of average
profit is also expected by being a full-service firm. Freelancers or studios
not providing full service will have a more difficult time acquiring larger
projects, even when their rates are comparable to full-service teams.
Other factors that might affect your rates when starting out are:
■

The quality of the pieces in your portfolio and integrity of your client list. If
you aren’t established in the area, have won few awards, and know
that you can do better work, but have not yet had the opportunity

(01)1-4 IDG Pricing, Estimating 3/3/05 3:05 PM Page 23

■

to prove yourself, it will be important to set a fair rate that will
attract clients and give you a chance to show what you can do. In
this case, a slightly lower “introductory” rate may be implemented
until you have achieved a few successes.
How much equipment you have. This becomes part of how high your
overhead is, which is directly reflected in your hourly rate equation.
Networking opportunities in your area. How many people do you
know, or how many friends could give you names of friends that
would be potential buyers of your services? Even if you are a great
interior designer, way ahead of your time, it might be difficult getting started if people in your job market don’t know you. Networking is simply a way of avoiding the cold calling that most of us
dread. Networking doesn’t get you the project, but it does help you
get in the door to present your portfolio and give onsite introductory consultation.

Now that you have absorbed all there is to know about setting your
rates, just do it! You’ve done your homework and deserve to go forward
with confidence that the rate you’ve established for yourself is the right
rate for you. In the long run, clients will respect you more if your rates
are objective and if you feel good enough about them to quote them as
being your own.

Comparing Your Rates

C OMPARE and C ONTRAST
■

The easiest way to discover that your rates are too high is to find yourself losing jobs to other firms offering a better price. Still, make sure that
you’re not too hasty to lower your rates before considering the old adage
about apples and oranges—are you comparing apples to apples? Lots of
times, my firm will lose a job to a smaller studio whose overhead is
obviously much lower than mine. I’ve gotten into the habit of
informing clients in a positive way that if they are asking smaller studios
for bids, ours is seldom the lowest one they will receive, then proceeding
to explain the many reasons why. I also inform them that we will not
enter a bid if they are shopping only for the lowest price.To me, this is
a waste of time.Who needs it?
The best way to discover if your rates are competitive is simply by
asking. Talk to your existing and prospective clients about other firms
they use. Make sure they are firms that provide services comparable to
yours. Have this conversation with someone you trust, with whom you
can share a frank discussion about rates. Sometimes, this is more easily
done in a casual atmosphere, like over lunch. But I can guarantee that

The Interior Designer’s Guide to P RICING, E STIMATING, and B UDGETING

■

(01)1-4 IDG Pricing, Estimating 3/3/05 3:05 PM Page 24

you won’t offend anyone by being directly concerned and receptive to
your client regarding rates if, for example, the subject comes up in a
business meeting while reviewing a specific project.
I can also promise you that as time goes on, you will gain more confidence and competence being your own businessperson in the design
industry, becoming less and less rate sensitive.You can trust that established firms will endorse my practice of first determining the value of a
job before even thinking about dropping rates to accommodate a
budget.We’ll discuss this in depth later in chapter 4.
The more time you spend in the business, the more likely you are to
come across a client or two who will complain about how high your
rates are, no matter what you charge them. I have a client who always
reminds me that my prices are so incredibly high, as high and sometimes
higher than his legal and accounting fees. How can I charge him so
much? I usually respond to him by laughing, as though he is making a
joke. I do think it’s pretty funny. He is actually one of my favorite clients
to do business with because he gets so excited about the creative
process. When his conversation turns to pricing, I have learned to say
“yeah, yeah” to myself, smile outwardly, and move directly into the creative part of our meeting. I have realized that it simply is his process to
nag about pricing. His rhetoric used to make me very defensive, and
when I asked him what he would like to pay for a project, I would say
to his answer, “You can’t be serious” with a good chuckle. After all, he
does keep coming back for more.
If you can’t stop obsessing about how your rates compare, do a
simple questionnaire in the form of a mailer to clients, vendors, and
other people associated with your industry. Ask them to respond to
questions regarding pricing issues. Make it user-friendly, with just a few
yes or no boxes to fill in, and perhaps one question that requires a
written answer. Use some visual design skills to make it an attractive
direct-mail sample itself—you never know where your next client may
come from. Give them an incentive to respond to you; design and produce a cool gift for just a few dollars. Count on getting a 5 to 10 percent response rate if you’re giving something away, and write off the
expenses as self-promotion.
It’s interesting to note that most firms charge a higher hourly rate for
the principal or owner(s) of the firm. For several years after starting my
own firm, my hourly rates were the same across the board. Basically, if our
cleaning woman delivered a set of revised drawings to the client on her
way home, the charge was the same as if I had done it.As the business has
grown, I find myself needing to be very selective about my time, and this

(01)1-4 IDG Pricing, Estimating 3/3/05 3:05 PM Page 25

is reflected in a higher hourly rate for my work. Many clients prefer and
even ask for me to be present during all phases of our projects together;
but this simply is not humanly possible.What I have found is that I need
to expose my capable staff to clients more often. Upon doing so, other
people on my staff become more credible to my clients, making it much
easier to justify our hourly rates and also saving me some sanity.

Very seldom will a client actually ask you what your hourly rates are.
When they do ask, simply share your per-task hourly rate range with
them. In my case, I don’t hesitate at all to offer the fact that our rates start
at $75 per hour—but I am quick to offer a short aside on my “value
theory” and on the fact that we use our hourly rates to back up our original estimates, mostly for internal purposes of monitoring productivity.
This conversation has appeased every client who has questioned me
about rates.
The following are summaries of the roles of principals of design firms,
senior designers, junior designers, and freelancers, as well as the
national-average billable hourly rates they charge:
■

■

The rates listed above are averages based on my personal informal
inquiry of my national client base as well as other design-firm owners. As
I mentioned before, I believe that the more experience an interior
designer has, the higher his or her rates can be. Typically, design firms do
not want to be singled out with published rates because of the confidential nature of the subject matter. My true belief is that their reason is fear
and paranoia of disclosing rates to clients. Trust me, they know anyway!

C OMPARE and C ONTRAST

Principal. Typically acts as creative director. Usually has well over
five years of specific design experience. Shares a lot of diverse
design, resources, and contractor expertise with clients. Manages
entire staff. Average hourly billable rate: $200.
Senior Designer. Has two to five years of experience. Often interacts
with clients. Delegates some work to others. Average hourly billable
rate: $125.
Junior Designer. Entry-level position. College or design school graduate. Minimal prior experience. Average hourly billable rate: $85.
Freelancer. Works independently. Usually has minimum of three
years prior design firm experience. Has flexibility and usually a
computer with appropriate software at his own office. Average
hourly billable rate: $40–75 (depends on experience and market).

■

The Interior Designer’s Guide to P RICING, E STIMATING, and B UDGETING

■

(01)1-4 IDG Pricing, Estimating 3/3/05 3:05 PM Page 26

When to Raise Your Rates
Raising your rates is not nearly as difficult in practice as you might
imagine, and the same rules apply for freelancers, small studios, and fullservice firms. Obtaining an affluent client list, completing a new home
or building in your area, or achieving recognition by designing community spaces will all help your business volume grow and result in a
reevaluation of your rate structure. By “affluent client list” I mean clients
who are respected—businesses that are prominent in your area, like
Fortune 500 companies, or even the city itself. Many small firms have
grown by doing public design work for local theater, dance, opera, and
other arts organizations.
Changing from a one- to two-person studio to a full-service firm
with more employees can mean charging higher rates. Providing new
services is another factor. For example, the computer revolution has
aided design by giving us greater ability to present even more concepts,
textures, and color solutions.This makes it evident that better in-house
printers, which require more ink, better paper, etc., may result in a ton
of additional expenses, gigabytes, more software, and a new assortment
of pricey hardware. Your pricing structure needs to be reevaluated before
you make these purchases (whether or not they are leases) to determine
their worth to your organization.
As your business grows, so does the caliber of your clientele and the
types of projects you are asked to work on. Rate increases can usually
be passed along to your new clients without any discussion at all,
because they have no previous history with your billing procedures. If
clients do think we’re expensive, I always respond with an analogy they
can relate to. For example, when a retail boutique client recently whined
about our design rates, I asked her if she was the cheapest retailer in the
city. She was offended; I had counted on that. I then asked her if she
didn’t think her hand-chosen, imported merchandise was worth the
extra money to her clients because of its unique origin, heirloom, and
finished quality. Of course, came the answer. Suddenly my pricing
became a moot point.
With any business growth comes the need for new staff members
and additional, often expensive, equipment. Reviewing your fixed list
twice a year will help you determine whether or not you need to
increase your rates. Rework your hourly-rate formula at this time as
well. If your cost of doing business has jumped dramatically, it may mean
having a face-to-face discussion with your long-term clients about why
you need to raise your rates.The goal is to inform them of your growth
and what this means to them in terms of new capabilities with your

(01)1-4 IDG Pricing, Estimating 3/3/05 3:05 PM Page 27

updated equipment, access to world markets, and more. Always point
out the benefit to the client when you are announcing any change in
rates. Significant growth always deserves to be discussed and promoted.
Send an upbeat letter to your entire client list announcing the new
additions—with perhaps a sample of your latest, hottest piece—as an icebreaker. Always share the new benefits and services that your client will
receive. Make it seem as though your new services and staff are worth
way more than your minimal price increase.Also in the letter, promise to
follow up with a personal call and never send out more letters than you
can properly follow through on.You can start the conversation by asking
something like, “Did you get our letter about our new capabilities?”
Once again, never apologize for your increase in rates; simply justify
them factually. Clients like to work with winners, and your rate increase
can be turned into good news for them in the long run.
Save the in-depth discussion of the rate increase until the face-toface meeting.That meeting will invariably turn into a sales call, and you
will take home an armload of projects that need pricing, estimating,
or budgeting.
If you’ve started out with a healthy hourly rate from the beginning,
you shouldn’t have to raise your rates very often. Raising rates by just a
few dollars an hour to cover new capabilities will probably never be
noticed by your clients. Many times, the addition of new equipment
will happen after your original equipment is paid off. If you keep that
monthly dollar allotment for equipment on your fixed list at all times,
your rates won’t be affected at all.
My friend and business partner, Chris Wire, uses a phrase for which
we cannot find an origin or author: “Quality is long remembered after
price is forgotten.” It’s a really beautiful saying that could transfer to just
about every business on earth.

C OMPARE and C ONTRAST
■

The Interior Designer’s Guide to P RICING, E STIMATING, and B UDGETING

■

(01)1-4 IDG Pricing, Estimating 3/3/05 3:05 PM Page 28

Case Study Interview
Angi Ma Wong, Feng Shui Master, Palos Verdes, California

Angi Ma Wong is an internationally recognized intercultural and feng
shui expert and consultant and the bestselling author of twenty-one
titles, including the popular Feng Shui Dos and Taboos® series. She has
appeared on Oprah, Regis, CNN Headline News, Discovery and Learning
channels, and in Time magazine.

Q. Angi, you have done interior design for a wide variety of clients—
from celebrities to your next-door neighbor. Do you change your
approach to fee structure with different levels of clients, or is it always
the same?
A. Basically, I charge by the hour, increasing or charging extra for travel
days, distance traveled, expenses for out-of-town appointments, and so
on, with separate scales for residential and commercial properties. For
large-scale projects, which may take much longer to complete, I charge
on a different fee structure by stages of work completed—for example,
the design phase, community outreach, marketing, and the sales phase—
plus expenses, depending on a fair estimate of how many hours, meetings, etc., the project may require.
Q. What and when was your first feng shui project and how did you
establish the fees for it?
A. When I first began providing feng shui consulting services more
than fifteen years ago, they originated from referrals from builders and
their salespeople who were looking for a consultant who was knowledgeable and could communicate well in English (many speak only
Chinese, with heavy accents, or act like fortune tellers or oracles).
Now 90 percent of my consultations come by word of mouth. Sorry,
I’m experiencing a Baby Boomer moment and truly do not remember
my first feng shui consultation. But I did begin feng shui consulting
with builders to create more feng shui–compliant homes for the
untapped Asian market between 1989 and 1993, during the California
real estate boom, and shortly after took on individual residential and
commercial clients.
I knew when I began conducting private residential assessments that
I was one of the very first and few feng shui consultants during that
time. (There were about six of us and we all knew each other’s work.
Now there are hundreds in Southern California.) I had more cultural

(01)1-4 IDG Pricing, Estimating 3/3/05 3:05 PM Page 29

knowledge and expertise than the average friend or neighbor who had
read a few books or taken a class and charged $25 an hour, so I started
out at $75 an hour.
Through the years, as my experience, expertise, professional training,
and celebrity grew, I raised my rates considerably. After all, the client is
getting a bestselling author and celebrity feng shui consultant!

Q. Do you find that technology has changed your business in any way?
Are potential customers now doing it themselves with interior design
software? If yes, how?
A. Technology has changed my business in that more people are finding and contacting me for consultations through my Web site
(www.FengShuiLady.com), after reading or purchasing one of my books,
kits, or calendars, or through a feature in the media. Most folks who are
practicing feng shui are doing so for personal reasons and not to become
practitioners. After doing some feng shui on their own, they get to the
point when they realize, very wisely, that there is a time to call in a pro
for more fine-tuning, just as you and I can add gas, water, or windshieldwiper fluid to our cars, but we’re smart enough not to start working on
the engine or the electronics on our own.
Also, there are many forms of feng shui and it is not easy to know
how to go about choosing the right forms for oneself. I personally
practice eight different forms, but basically I am a traditional, classical
feng shui practitioner who uses the Chinese luopan (compass) in
my work.

Q. Do

C OMPARE and C ONTRAST

you worry about competitors, specifically with regard to the
pricing structure of other firms?
A. No. Feng shui consultants usually work independently and I do not
know how they consult or charge. I want to help as many people as possible, while at the same time know what my value is, and charge what
the market can bear, e.g., more affordable consultations versus fewer at
higher fees. However, I was interviewed about a year ago by a person
who wanted to bring consultants together to “standardize” feng shui
compliancy, with regard to a clothing line he wanted to start. In his
interviews with thirty “top” consultants nationwide, he revealed that I
was in the low to middle range and suggested I immediately raise my
rates. About a third [of the consultants] earned more than six figures a
year, and I was one of them.

■

The Interior Designer’s Guide to P RICING, E STIMATING, and B UDGETING

■

(01)1-4 IDG Pricing, Estimating 3/3/05 3:05 PM Page 30

Q. Do

you provide everything from concept to installation? Why or
why not?
A. No. Typically I work with individual clients by just providing the
consultation with the architect and/or interior designer present, especially with remodeling or new-home design. Sometimes, my services are
engaged for a day or more and I am shopping with the client or assisting
in selecting or deciding on furnishings, colors, accessories, etc., from catalogs. When I work with commercial or real estate developers, I am a
presenter to the entire design team—the architect, developer, interior
designer, landscape designer—and they are all taking notes so as to integrate the feng shui principles into their concepts.Afterwards, I am accessible to all team members to answer any questions they have.This works
well because the entire group hears exactly the same information and
responses to any challenges, concerns, or clarification about any aspect
of the design. I am not involved in fabrication or installation, as these
are not my areas of expertise or training. But I do review and pass judgments on elevations, plans, color boards, and renderings for accuracy.

Q. What do your presentations consist of?
A. Included are always the basics of feng shui: colors; numbers; elements;
plants; signage; names, such as street, development, and model; symbols;
and any other pertinent information related to the project room by room
from the site, floor, and landscaping plans. I help to choose fabrics and
wallpaper; architectural features; colors of stucco and tile; roofing, exterior and interior paint colors; hard and soft scapes; and more that are presented by the interior and landscape designers. When the architectural
design is conceptualized, I point out any feng shui concerns so they can
be addressed and mitigated in the earliest stages of the preliminary
design, before they get incorporated or too far along to be corrected.
Early “intervention” is infinitely more cost effective than trying to fix bad
feng shui after the product has been through several plan checks or is
completed! It saves time and money in the long run for my clients.

Q. Have you had a good, ongoing client with whom you have had to
change your fee structure? If so, how did you handle that change?
A. Yes. In the past, many of my developer clients have contacted me to
consult on their various current projects and developments anywhere
from one to ten years later, as they remember the work that I have conducted for them in the past.As my fees have increased incrementally, often
the management has changed or former fees are not kept on record from
the last time I did work for them, so my fees are just accepted.

(01)1-4 IDG Pricing, Estimating 3/3/05 3:05 PM Page 31

The Client’s Budget

any factors can affect the way you price various projects.
Some of those factors relate to what you might gain from
doing the project (other than money!), some relate to what your
client can afford, and then there are factors that you just can’t
control, like changes in the overall economy or the particular
economic climate of your region. Do some homework before
sharing your pricing. Can the project elevate your standing as an
interior designer within your community? Is your client a
smaller businessperson who has a lot of growth potential
resulting in good networking opportunities for you? Is the
economy in your area a little slow? These are all reasons to think
strategically about how you can and should price a project.

First, Do Your Homework
Why does the word budget seem to reverberate from the darkest,
meanest corners of the world, ricochet from the earth’s highest
cloud ceiling, and come back to hit us all in the head? Really,
someone should come up with a better word. More often than
not, I’ve found that the most dreaded budget—the one that
some executives sat up all night establishing, subtracting from,
adding to, and pulling their hair out over months ago—is not as
bad as it seems after all.
The most important thing to know about budgets is that it’s
okay to talk about them. Many designers choose to ignore
budgets when indeed a budget can become your best friend.
(Well, maybe not, but certainly a worthy ally!)
The second most important thing to know is that your client
is just as intimidated by the B word as you are. The sooner you
break the budget barrier down, the better for both of you.
It’s simple: Ask. If the client has a budget in mind and shares
it with you, the outcome can only be one of two possibilities—

The Interior Designer’s Guide to P RICING, E STIMATING, and B UDGETING

■

(01)1-4 IDG Pricing, Estimating 3/3/05 3:05 PM Page 32

there’s either enough money set aside for your specific project or there
isn’t—and either way, you can show your professionalism by jumping
into the driver’s seat and making everybody, including yourself, happy!
Taking the lead on the matter gives your client confidence in your
capabilities. If not enough moneys are set aside, it’s your responsibility
to educate your client as to why the amounts are insufficient for the
desired end result.And on the rare occasion when the budget is higher
than you expected (those occasions do indeed exist), use it to create a
high-end, awesome environment that you and your client can be
proud of.
Established commercial real estate companies, architects, and developers who are experienced in buying design services generally understand fee structures and are most often prepared and forthcoming with
monetary information. Often, these clients are required, by company
policy or sometimes even by law (if it is a public entity), to obtain three
bids for the same project. Rarely are they obligated to take the lowest
bid. This is not the case with government or nonprofit organizations.
When they ask for multiple bids, they are usually shopping for the
lowest price. Ask. It is typical to discuss what the pricing or bidding
parameters are before you get started.
Many times, smaller clients will ask you to assist in the budgetmaking process. This is a great sign of their trust in you, and often
they will use your estimate as their budget. Know that you are doing
their homework in this case; make sure that you carefully review each
element of the project, and don’t try to go for the high dollar. This
isn’t a gambling casino; it’s your career. I’m always reticent, however,
to help clients establish a budget if they are then going to go out and
get bids from other firms. If this will be their modus operandi, I ask
for at least a modest fee covering my time in order to establish the
budget for them.
Establishing trust between you and your client is imperative for you
to offer competitive pricing and budgeting—and also for you to create
dynamic, creative end results. It’s a sad day when your client asks you to
establish a budget, and then, after several weeks pass by without a return
phone call, you finally get him at his desk, and he announces that he’s
given the project to someone else. The Terminator? Might as well be.
You’ve been duped, and it’s a discouraging and crushing feeling. It happens to the best of us, and it will happen to you, too.
Just make sure that you’ve learned what to do the next time you’re
faced with this type of situation. I spend a lot of time role-playing critical communication issues like this. It’s tough to think on your toes when

(01)1-4 IDG Pricing, Estimating 3/3/05 3:05 PM Page 33

a client delivers information that you were not expecting. Get yourself
one of those little handheld voice-activated recorders, and talk to yourself. I do it all the time while I’m driving the highways (more often getting stuck in gridlock) in Los Angeles. Sure, people look at me strangely,
but who cares? I’m role-playing. What could be more important? Play
the tape back, and really listen to yourself. Do you sound apprehensive
or self-confident? Do you stumble around with ums and ohs while
you’re trying to get your message across, or do you make sense? Is your
vocabulary weak or concise and intelligent-sounding? You are your
worst critic. If you’re anything like the typical perfectionist designer,
keep on talking until you feel like you’re ready to make the call or
appointment.You’ll be glad you finished your homework!

When the Budget Is Too Small

T HE C LIENT ’ S B UDGET
■

There will be occasions when there simply isn’t enough money in the
client’s domain to pay your rates or to produce the project to the height
of design and finishes you originally had in mind. One of the hardest
things to learn is how to gracefully, but emphatically, say “No, thank
you.” Saying no will probably close the door to future endeavors with
this particular client, but it comes with its own set of advantages—it
shows that you are serious about your rates and the services you provide,
and it also gives you the opportunity to refer a friend in the industry who
might have lower rates and be an excellent fit with this client’s needs.
What goes around always tends to come around, you know.
If you stay within your current community for a long period of time
and are committed to business growth and image, clients whom you
turned down often roll back around to your starting gate. Your client
will either grow his business, thus moving to a new space in need of
design, or change career tracks and go to work for another company
you are either already servicing or, better yet, one that requires your
services.You could end up working on a civic project together or some
other nonprofit community endeavor. You never know where Mr. or
Ms. Client will show his or her face. So, if you bow out of a project
because a budget is too low, make sure you don’t burn any bridges.Your
“cheap client” today could be your stepping-stone to bigger and better
projects tomorrow.
Your other option when a budget appears to be too low is to say yes
because the project offers you the potential for a great portfolio piece,
or because this may be a new type of client who will enhance your
firm’s flexibility by adding diversity to your growing client list. If you
decide to proceed with a budget that you know is not high enough, it

The Interior Designer’s Guide to P RICING, E STIMATING, and B UDGETING

■

(01)1-4 IDG Pricing, Estimating 3/3/05 3:05 PM Page 34

is very important that you set parameters with your client up front.You
may decide to produce the design solution in your firm’s downtime—
thus taking a longer period of time than normal to complete the
project. Or you may suggest that the clients become more involved in
providing elements of the project, such as hiring subcontractors or
doing some of the painting themselves.
The important thing in dealing with an under-budget job is not to
build resentment because of the money you are not being paid.After all,
you did say yes, and it wasn’t because Bruno was twisting your arm.Take
responsibility for your actions, and be as professional and efficient with
the matter as you would with a big-budget job.The payoff is in the end
product: the smile on your client’s face and the next job you get as a
result of this one!

Building Strong Allies
Taking on an under-budget assignment may also be an opportunity to
work with a new, perhaps smaller subcontractor or craftsperson. Perhaps
you have had a new furniture maker or lighting manufacturer calling on
you whose work looks nice and who you really want to try, but you
haven’t had the right project until now. Be very honest with new
resources when you ask them to work with you. Don’t use them unless
you sincerely want to establish an ongoing relationship.You don’t want
the reputation of being a carrot dangler.
Maybe an established resource has a new line that it might be willing
to invoice at a lower rate. I saw this happen, for example, when a popular
textile manufacturer introduced a new line of lighting into the marketplace.The company wanted a comprehensive project that would show off
their textile and lighting line together. It just so happened that a small but
good client of mine had decided to open a small but all-new office in a
large city and needed a prestigious-looking space for this new endeavor,
but the budget was extremely limited.The result was an environment that
made everyone—manufacturer, client, and me—very happy!
There are some beautiful, majestic public spaces, like museums,
university libraries, concert halls, and places for art gatherings in your
region, right? You know, those phenomenal buildings always sporting
the latest eye candy lusciously designed using all the latest trends—and
you’d just do anything to get that tasty, lip-smacking job for your portfolio.Well, they usually don’t pay you enough to go out and buy a case
of candy bars.Truly.
If the client is a nonprofit entity, many subcontractors will price their
participation in the project accordingly. Some subcontractors will even

(01)1-4 IDG Pricing, Estimating 3/3/05 3:05 PM Page 35

donate their services if asked or if given a generous lead-time in which
to turn the project around. It is wise to have your client do the asking
for favors such as donated services. Encourage them to tell subcontractors that they will receive credits on printed advertisements or program
pieces for services or items they donate. Once again, your reputation is
at stake; and you don’t want to be known as the design firm from the
freebie-asking kingdom. Save your favor-asking for the times when you
will need those favors to cover yourself. Manufacturers and subcontractors will have a harder time saying no to a nonprofit client that is producing a job for a worthy cause than they would have saying no to you.

Wants Versus Needs

T HE C LIENT ’ S B UDGET
■

A major factor to consider when dealing with an unrealistic budget is
the matter of what the client may want versus your professional opinion
of what the client really needs. Many times, I have met with clients who
think they need a full-blown remodeled space, when in actuality they
may just need some fresh paint, some well-watered plants instead of the
withering ferns crouched in the corner, and a few new pieces of art on
the walls.Another typical example of clients’ wants versus needs may be
a brand-new company that moves into a new space wanting all the latest
Eames and Herman Miller furniture when Ikea might do just as well for
the time being.
A healthy alternative in these types of situations is to offer to tier a
program for your client. Perhaps you work on some smart temporary
solutions now with a strong color and foundational design concept,
leaving plenty of open spaces working with modulars, instead of
building walls that will require artwork immediately.This way, you don’t
overwhelm your client with one big invoice it may not be able to pay.
Setting priorities in this manner shows your clients that you care, that
you understand budget constraints, that you are interested in teaming up
with them to better their image, and that you want a long-term relationship. It also puts you in that omni-desirable driver’s seat.
Don’t forget that different-sized businesses will require you to think
in different ways about pricing. For example, a new environment for the
new corner deli cannot possibly cost as much as an executive dining
room at Universal Studios. At first, the thought of charging different
rates for different clients may seem unethical, but this is not the case.
Think of this practice as being a close companion to the value-rating
method discussed in chapter 2. The larger corporate clients are simply
going to have more layers of work and approval processes, ultimately
requiring more time and higher fees.

The Interior Designer’s Guide to P RICING, E STIMATING, and B UDGETING

■

(01)1-4 IDG Pricing, Estimating 3/3/05 3:05 PM Page 36

Consider the following scenario: When a large local developer
recently asked a firm to design the interiors of seven different model
homes for a new neighborhood of 244 condominium houses, it also
asked for a budget, including printed materials for new homeowners
showing finished design options, several different pricing tiers of fixture,
lighting, and appliance selections, and four different comprehensive
interior color palettes from which its customers could choose.The estimate requested $12,000 for the lighting option selection alone, while
just a few weeks prior to that, an entire real estate office was designed
for only $2,500.
The developer’s project required countless meetings, extensive
research about the specific target audience, strategic environmental
analysis, ADA research and requirement fulfillment, and the development of printed collateral for a simultaneous public-relations campaign. On the other hand, the new real estate office was relatively
simple—one initial client meeting with only two principals who were
very organized and knew what they wanted, virtually no research—
plus an additional incentive: the realtor was a new neighbor to the
designer’s studio. You never know when you might need to borrow
your neighbor’s snow blower, and, in this case, when you might need
to sell or relocate your business.
Again, as with budget-driven pricing, think about what’s in it for
your firm when establishing rates for smaller clients versus larger, moreestablished ones. Consider the visibility for your business of smallerbudget projects. Also, possible barter situations or extended payment
arrangements may once again surface with the smaller client. We’ll go
into detail on more pricing options in chapter 7.
While you should be careful not to interrupt important cash flow by
adjusting your rates downward for smaller businesses, these types of
projects might actually be scheduled for production during slower
periods, which could help you in the long run. And don’t forget the
potential for that small start-up business to become a full-fledged corporation . . . sooner than you think.

Work Now, Get Paid Later . . . Not
I don’t think there’s a designer or design firm out there today who hasn’t
gotten burned yet by a seemingly promising, up-and-coming company
of one type or another.This happened very frequently during the dotcom boom. These guys seemed to be just about everywhere, needing
everything and demanding the latest in hi-tech-looking interiors.
Unfortunately for many, the nonpaying dot-coms became stereotypical

(01)1-4 IDG Pricing, Estimating 3/3/05 3:05 PM Page 37

T HE C LIENT ’ S B UDGET
■

clients for interior designers and their subcontractors. At first, they
appeared very attractive. Cash was flowing from capital investors, young
entrepreneurs wanted the latest colors, textures, and the most contemporary, exciting design solutions. So when a dot-com sprouted up in a
neighborhood, competition was fierce for the designing.
After producing a couple of designs in the Midwest for some supposedly high-tech dot-com start-ups—and never receiving payment—I
was asked by a client of mine at Universal Studios to meet a friend of
his who was starting a “very high-end dot-com.”These people were just
getting their funding, and everything was hunky-dory, howdy-doody, or
whatever the phrase might be.You get the picture. I took the time to
meet one of the new owners, who had impressed my credible client
enough to impress me. This dot-com was on the West Coast after all,
and that was where all of them with the big money were, right?
Turns out, I really liked the president and founder of this new dotcom. He was very sharp, well dressed, incredibly articulate, and already
had a decent list of clients. His funding was just around the corner. His
career history had attracted plenty of new clients to his business. He
needed beautiful custom textiles for his office environment, and he
needed them yesterday. Now this was a project with which I could be
exceedingly creative and proficient.
I was immediately brought in to meet the other owners. We all
clicked right away. The president was very honest. They had less than
$10,000 in cash, more likely $8,000. But he was willing to rent furnishings and art initially to allow me time to create the best solution for the
new space, which was in a high-rent, high-profile district and was certain to open new client opportunities for me. I literally ended up
spending several hours (unheard of for such a low-budget project) in the
initial meeting with these people.
I created fantastic design solutions for this company. The first clue
that something was going wrong was that, after revising the designs to
the decision makers’ likings, I didn’t hear from them for a couple weeks.
Repeated efforts to call and e-mail went unanswered. Even my big
client from Universal tried to call on our behalf. He was supposed to be
on their newly forming board of directors, and he was embarrassed that
he had introduced us. Everyone was perplexed, but still gave the new
start-up the benefit of the doubt. They just seemed so credible—how
could all of us be so wrong?
It turned out we weren’t really wrong. After two months passed, the
president finally called to inform me that the company was going under.
The interesting factor here was that the company players were still

The Interior Designer’s Guide to P RICING, E STIMATING, and B UDGETING

■

(01)1-4 IDG Pricing, Estimating 3/3/05 3:05 PM Page 38

credible business people. They were astoundingly creative and had an
excellent business concept.The plain and simple fact was that they had
never landed their big financing support. Every day, grassroots companies obtain their operational licenses, hoping and crossing their toes,
working their butts off until they get so burnt out they just can’t go
anymore.The dot-com’s idea was still great.They just couldn’t sell it to
venture capitalists.
Shame on me for letting this waste my time and energy. I should
have been very systematic about requesting credit information from this
company—their banker’s name and phone number and the names of
companies who were already extending credit. Even new businesses
have established credit with phone companies, power and light companies, and other basic-needs support services. I could have—and should
have—taken the time to ask the right questions and check out their
wherewithal before moving forward. I have no excuse. All the intuition
in the world on all of our parts did not pay off. I even have a full-time
(nonbillable) office manager to whom I can delegate the types of
administrative tasks required for background and credit checks. Geez.

Consider Your Options
If you do accept a job at a lower fee, it is not unusual to ask clients if
you can install promotional signage in front of their entity while the
work is in progress, or even print a simple brochure, highlighting
before-and-after shots with some promotional information about your
firm. Many times, distributing this promotional literature (via postal
mail or e-mail) to your mailing list can enhance and expand your
client’s visibility to your specific audience, thus adding some possible
residual benefits for both sides.
There are always more options to consider when the client’s budget
isn’t big enough. Use your intuition. I know this sounds ethereal to a lot
of readers, but we all have intuition inherent to ourselves. Go out and
buy a book on how to tap into yours if you think you don’t have any—
you do. Check your gut, and ask it if this client is worth going out on
a limb for. After your gut says yes, ask the client for some credit references if they’re a small business or start-up.
Then, roll up your sleeves and have a brainstorming session with the
client and figure things out. Set up a payment plan for your client that
you feel comfortable with—perhaps on an ongoing monthly basis.This
could help both you and your client’s cash flow. Eliminate costly presentations; provide them in an informal manner, maybe even on your
laptop, having bookmarked, for example, furnishings you selected from

(01)1-4 IDG Pricing, Estimating 3/3/05 3:05 PM Page 39

Internet catalogs.Technology has rewarded the industry with the ability
to provide beautiful, brilliant, comprehensive presentations for the cost
of some printer ink and nice paper.You can even try going with some
sketches and a verbal walk-through of your concept, using simple ideaboards showing your designs. Make sure you get the client’s buy-in on
the initial concepts before you jump into the costly act of hiring subcontractors and making purchases you don’t want to redo or return,
with costly restocking fees.
Try replacing original artwork with quality poster prints, use
linoleum or marmoleum instead of wood or tiles. Rely on basic, functional interior design for a change. Design a great black-and-white
space—or simple open spaces with classic colors. Less can truly be more.
You might also choose lesser-grade woods or counter finishes; ask your
suppliers to help you reduce costs. With imported pieces flooding the
marketplace and new flooring and finishing options permeating our
senses daily, opportunities abound to be creatively—and beautifully—
cost efficient.
Use budgets as a stepping-stone to better client relations, to increase
your own knowledge, and as a reference for future projects. The more
input you bring to your client regarding a budget, the better for both of
you.The most important thing to remember about budgets is not to be
intimidated by them, but to embrace and accept them for what they are.

T HE C LIENT ’ S B UDGET
■

(01)1-4 IDG Pricing, Estimating 3/3/05 3:05 PM Page 40

(02)5-8 IDG Pricing, Estimating 3/3/05 3:07 PM Page 41

More on Value Rating

introduced value rating in chapter 2 of this book, and like the
prior chapter on the client’s budget, value rating deserves a lot
more discussion and in greater detail. There can actually be a
considerable amount of appreciation for you in value rating—
even from a profitability standpoint. Most of the pricing I do for
my textile design projects is based on value rating. After I assign
a value to a project, however, I always go back and divide the
value rate by the amount of hours I believe the project will take,
to determine whether or not I am close to my computed hourly
rate described in my master formula. Invariably, I am ahead of
the game when I do value rating, but until you get a very clear
idea of what a project can, and should, go for pricing-wise, it is
smarter to stay with your master formula.

Prepare for the Unexpected
Current events play an extremely significant role in fee structuring. During our latest national economic downturn, many
interior design and service support firms went out of business
because they were not flexible enough to respond to the dramatic
drop in workflow.
Keeping up with national news is vital to every business, but
keep in mind that professionals in the creative industries often
suffer the most when times are tight.Why? More often than not,
large companies sever their moving, furniture-purchasing, and
design budgets, making their existing spaces and furnishings do
until financial times turn around. If you keep informed on the
latest happenings, you can tighten the belt buckle on things like
overhead, new equipment purchases, and employee hirings while
bracing for the storm. Eventually, the weather clears, and you
find yourself busier than ever. Everything’s a cycle, after all.
Something that you can never fully be prepared for—
resulting in possible cascades of unmanageable workflows for

The Interior Designer’s Guide to P RICING, E STIMATING, and B UDGETING

■

(02)5-8 IDG Pricing, Estimating 3/3/05 3:07 PM Page 42

interior designers—is a natural disaster. While the economy may be
doing its own thing as per usual, and you have stacks of local and
national newspapers to prove your willingness to stay informed, an
unexpected new situation can happen in a matter of seconds. If a hurricane, earthquake, or other natural disaster hits your area, you can be
assured that it will affect your business in some way.
Unfortunately, even personal accidents occur. I was driving to the
golf course to play a round of golf one early-spring day. Business was
great, I was laughing with my best girlfriend about some type of nonsense, and seconds later found myself with only a memory of crunching
metal and breaking glass. Our car had been hit from behind, leaving me
with a bulging disk in my neck, over a hundred days off work for physical therapy, two years of working in pain, and a newfound litigation
attorney I was forced to hire to settle the matter and recoup losses.
The economy had nothing to do with the resulting business loss.
However, I was forced to face some pretty heavy overhead issues that
resulted in the restructuring of rates and the way business was done in
my absence. Until the accident, I was our primary salesperson. Not so
smart. If you are the sole salesperson and income driver for your firm,
make sure you have a good disability policy that will cover your personal income in case you are temporarily—or worse, permanently—
unable to work because of an accident or catastrophic illness. If you run
a business with a partner,“key-man” insurance is advised to cover either
one of you on the other’s behalf.These issues are not pleasant to think
about, but they are sound business investments all in the cause of basic
business survival.

Self-Promotional Value
Another reason you might decide to try value pricing is because the
project has the potential to reward you with some self-promotional
value. Perhaps it’s selecting the color palette, finishes, seating, and
lighting for a prominent historical theater renovation in your region.
These projects are usually very high profile and make great portfolio
pieces—but they’re generally low in budgetary allotment because they
are funded by grants and public and private donations. Deciding
whether or not there is any real self-promotion value in a project is
pretty easy.Always stay focused on your big career picture when you are
making this decision, not allowing yourself to get caught up in “should
I do this, but they need me to do this, or what if I don’t do this” types
of scenarios.

(02)5-8 IDG Pricing, Estimating 3/3/05 3:07 PM Page 43

What’s in It for Me ?
■

■

Answering yes to any of the above questions can be sufficient for your
affirmative decision to design a value-rated piece, possibly at a lesser
rate than you might normally charge. However, only you can make the
final decision, which will usually depend on just how busy you are (or
aren’t) when such an opportunity arises.

M ORE on VALUE R ATING

Does the project allow any kind of growth for you? If you are new
to your community or if you are a new business start-up, this may be
a great way to make yourself known.
Is it a new, possibly ongoing client opportunity? Keeping with my
example of a local arts organization—for example, a ballet or opera
company—many times these organizations have some funds set
aside for their annual redesigns of certain areas or satellite locations.
Does it involve the potential of a new design, material, or finish that
you have wanted to try? Perhaps there is a chance for you to try
something you’ve never done before, and thus an opportunity for
experimentation on a real process, while simultaneously getting
educated. Sound like a win-win?
Does it provide any networking opportunities for future sales
potential within your client’s organization? Translation: Are there
important members on your local opera’s board of directors who
could be potential corporate clients?
Will it open new doors for you because this is a new type of client
that you have never serviced before? I don’t know how many times
I’ve shown my portfolio to a client in an industry I have never
serviced before, and they won’t consider me only because I have
never done work for the widget-crafting industry—or whatever
business they happen to be in. You and I know that good interior
design is just that—it doesn’t matter what the business is. But the
uneducated creative-services buyer doesn’t have a clue and wants
to see something pertaining to his industry in your book.
Will the end result be portfolio quality? It would be great if every job
could be a portfolio job (and there is no reason not to strive for this) but,
realistically, we all know that not every job is. So if you want to sink
your keyboard into a specific project, this might be your magic moment.
Is the client willing to give you credit for the design and agree to
print this credit on any printed promotional pieces highlighting his
company (and thus your work)? If the client allows you to print a
mouse-size credit on the piece, you’re golden. Ask the printer for
extra samples to send to your own mailing list. You might have to
pay a minimal amount for overruns . . . but it will be worth it.

The Interior Designer’s Guide to P RICING, E STIMATING, and B UDGETING

■

(02)5-8 IDG Pricing, Estimating 3/3/05 3:07 PM Page 44

Pro Bono Work
If you thought pro bono only applied to law firms, think again—and
think hard! Once you’ve opened your doors as a businessperson, the
favor-asking follows close behind. Accepting jobs for no fee needs to
be done selectively, while making sure that doing so does not disrupt
your cash flow or place too great a significance on pro bono jobs over
paying clients. Finding the right balance of when to say yes to such
projects can be difficult—especially if you’re one of those types who
never say no.
If you know that you are indeed one of those people who can
never say no, you’re probably giving way too much work to many
outstretched hands for the wrong reasons. Know that this can possibly
result in great, ongoing grief for you with your peers. It’s tough to
give something for nothing.You must be a master at finessing creative
control, talking and presenting (typically) to a powerful board of
directors, and savvy at obtaining constructive criticism from a group
such as this. Doesn’t sound like much fun, does it? Most established
interior design firms stay far away from this practice, leaving some
space for those starting out to take the reigns and ride into the night.
Requests for pro bono work should always come from nonprofit entities. I cannot stress the significance of my last sentence enough. Small
businesses starting out, or other “needy” companies or clubs, will not—
I promise you—respect your process if you are going to give away your
goods for free. They will dime and dollar you to your creative demise,
and you will ultimately regret your generosity—even if you think you’re
doing yourself a favor to get some great samples into your portfolio.You
will also certainly set a precedent for being a “cheap” designer, and
when you go to charge your real hourly or value rates, you’ll be questioned and ridiculed because “you didn’t charge us that much on the last
job we did.”
In my opinion, pro bono is a necessary evil for the design community to embrace and accept. How many times have you been on an airplane and the flight attendant asks if there is a doctor on board?
Designers are the communications doctors for organizations like your
local performing arts groups or disease-research fundraiser parties.They
all need well-designed, functional, aesthetic environments. Many of
these projects are things like special events, trade shows, museums, and
theaters—the fun stuff we all love to design. Ironically, these projects are
usually big attention-getters in our industry because it is typically
understood—and if not understood, it is up to you to make the fact

(02)5-8 IDG Pricing, Estimating 3/3/05 3:07 PM Page 45

known—that if you are not going to charge for your fees, the creative
direction of the project (within reason) is yours. Next should come the
press photos of opening night or even a feature article in regional or
national publications.
There are a number of nonmonetary benefits to providing your
services at no cost. Consider some of the following issues when you
make your decision:
■

■

M ORE on VALUE R ATING

■

Giving something back to your community. We all want to give something back that we can feel good about. Good intentions of
donating cash to causes we feel are worthy don’t always translate
into action—there never seems to be enough left over after the bills
are paid. Pro bono work is a way to share your expertise by creating
results-oriented design, thus providing actual value to causes near
and dear to your heart.
Portfolio potential. Most pro bono clients should agree to give you
free rein creatively (while providing them with good design to
fulfill their needs within their operating budget, of course). It
would be unethical for them to ask you to do something for free
and then tell you exactly how to do it. Unethical, yes, but believe
me, they’ll try. Make sure to lay at least the groundwork for your
creative freedom before entering into any agreement, and know
that with larger nonprofit organizations, you will be presenting to
a board of directors with varied opinions, tastes, and attitudes
toward design.
Networking. All nonprofit groups I have worked with have influential businesspeople on their boards of directors. When word of
your generosity reaches them, they will most likely be inclined to
meet with you and help you make contacts within their own
companies, which could mean new sales opportunities for your
firm. This opportunity will present itself as your project unfolds.
You will probably meet certain “committee” (that is, the marketing or design committee) board members who will influence
the entire board’s final decision as to whether or not to accept
your work.
Ask to be the presenter at the “big” board meeting. This is an invaluable
experience for you and the right time to make yourself known. If
you are unaccustomed to presenting to large groups, what better
format with which to gain the experience than one with a lot of
decision makers, earnest to learn from your presentation? You can’t

The Interior Designer’s Guide to P RICING, E STIMATING, and B UDGETING

■

(02)5-8 IDG Pricing, Estimating 3/3/05 3:07 PM Page 46

■

make a mistake; you’re there for free. It might help you, as you
introduce yourself to this group, to thank them for the opportunity to provide your services (it’s the perfect time to crack a joke
about their lack of budget).You might even say that this experience is a win-win for all of you, because you are gaining some
valuable practice from it yourself, such as presenting to a large
group, presenting with a microphone, and so on. Use this time to
educate the audience on your design sense; you’re the expert—
that’s why you’re up there. Make sure they know it by the time
you’re done.
Self-promotion. Since your pro bono designs will be portfolio quality,
ask them to include your name on any press releases or printed
information that goes out to the press or general public. If printed
material is produced, ask for samples to distribute to your own
mailing list. On more than one occasion, pro bono work I have
designed was mailed to my own mailing list as part of my agreement—at no cost to me. Most nonprofits have a healthy mailingexpense budget. If you can show them that your own firm’s mailing
list might include potential investors or donors, it may well be
worth their while to include your mailing list in their own. As with
all pro bono work, it is very common to include a printed “design
by” at the bottom of the piece so that everyone who receives it will
also see your name.

Alternatives to providing projects totally free include charging a discounted rate or bartering for things like season tickets or recognition
as a corporate sponsor in the organization’s program. In some cases, I
have asked clients to pay our regular fees, then on receipt of their
check I immediately write my own company check back to their
organization.This way, I post my check as a promotional expense and
can take the amount as a legal tax deduction because I am indeed
using it for my own promotional purposes. To date, the IRS does not
consider time spent (even when translated to a dollar amount or
hourly rate) in providing design services to nonprofit entities as a
legitimate tax deduction. By requesting that a nonprofit entity pay for
your services and then immediately refunding their money with a
company check for the same amount or more, you are legally allowed
to take the contribution as a tax write-off (even though you must
declare the income). And, more importantly, it allows you to publicly
announce your donation.

(02)5-8 IDG Pricing, Estimating 3/3/05 3:07 PM Page 47

When to Say Yes or No to Pro Bono
Say YES to a pro bono when . . .
■ You are interested in the subject matter or support the cause of the
organization asking for your help.
■ The client gives you creative control and promises not to direct you
to pieces.
■ The client is actively involved in the organization of other free
aspects needed to complete the job, like formally requesting pro
bono or discounted rates from subcontractors, manufacturers, and
suppliers. You should not be expected to ask your subcontractors or
vendors for favors; but you can refer your client to vendors who you
think might help.
■ The client agrees to give your firm credit for doing the work via a
“design by,” a footnote on any printed pieces and a prominent place
in appropriate press releases.
■ A client offers to introduce you to board members and key people
within the organization.
■ It has the potential to be an award-winning or portfolio-quality
design.
Say NO to a pro bono when . . .
■ The client seems hesitant about any of the above.
■ A client does not agree to pay for your outside expenses, like travel
or specific materials required to complete the project.
■ You’re way too busy and already incurring overtime costs with your
current staff salaries and projects.
■ Intuition 101 kicks in and you get a bad gut feeling.

Value pricing gives you a tremendous opportunity to stand out against
your competition. And not always in good ways. My favorite client
always reminds me,“Your work is expensive.You charge me as much as
my lawyer does.” These types of comments always made me cringe in
the early days of owning my business. Luckily, he usually ends his comments with something like,“but you’re good, you always come up with
something new, and I like that,” quickly followed by,“but I can’t use you
for everything.”

M ORE on VALUE R ATING

Ruling the Competition

■

The Interior Designer’s Guide to P RICING, E STIMATING, and B UDGETING

■

(02)5-8 IDG Pricing, Estimating 4/1/05 3:08 PM Page 48

Honestly, there was a time when I wished that every client I had
would use me for everything. A one-stop shopping interior design
firm—yessirree. You want a new paint scheme? We’ll do a new paint
scheme. You want wallpaper installed in your bathrooms? I love wallpaper projects.You want a hand-carved credenza from Bali reassembled
after it has been crated and shipped? Well, we don’t really do assembly,
but what the heck, sure, we’ll do that too!
Perhaps you can get some insight here into where I’m going with
this dialogue: Most interior design businesses open their doors as littleknown organizations. Producing some high-visibility projects and
calling on the largest potential client companies will slowly help you to
become recognized. Sixteen years later, your big client at Universal
Studios in Hollywood is telling you that your prices are as high as his
big Los Angeles advertising agency.What’s wrong with that picture? The
answer is, what’s right about that picture?
Any time a potential client asks who your competition is, try
answering their question unfalteringly.“We really have no competition,”
should be your consistent answer.They will look at you quizzically, listening to you going on about the fact that you create work that specifically answers your clients’ needs, not your own. Not only are you in the
interior design business to get results from the beautiful, comfortable,
and functional environment you create for your clients; you’re also in
the business to get the clients’ repeat business and referrals.This dialogue
will result in clients who are ultimately happy with your pricing structure in return for the value of work they are receiving.There is no better
reward for you than a repeat client or one who is glad to extend referrals to your organization or write letters of recommendation for your
larger endeavors.
I think this philosophy is important to any size firm or studio.Your
“competition” might have the coolest Web site, the slickest salespeople,
and the biggest expense accounts, but at the end of the day, the “right”
clients for you will be the ones who like you because of your work, not
because you drive a nice car or you go out to fancy lunches.
Consistency in your pricing structure is a significant priority.
Especially within a large company like Universal, don’t get fooled by the
fact that the advertising department is in building number 1102 and the
property development group is in building number 418. Everybody
talks and compares—especially if you’re doing your job right. You
should never take the chance of pricing one way for one group and
another way for another group unless you want to do some serious
explaining and hula-hooping in front of a large crowd some day.

(02)5-8 IDG Pricing, Estimating 3/3/05 3:07 PM Page 49

M ORE on VALUE R ATING

Let’s face it . . . having our work featured in magazines does get us
attention. I can say to our staff that our greatest reward is a repeat
client—and I mean it. But the ultimate is a repeat client for whom you
win recognition—in your own trade magazines or theirs! Ruling the
competition also happens gradually, as the local and regional newspapers
or general business magazines—as well as local and international design
competitions—recognize your work. It’s always a treat to not be one of
the big kids on the block and then leave an industry awards program
with a big box full of accolades and handshakes.
Entering design awards programs can be incredibly expensive. Set
aside a certain amount of money within your own firm’s budget every
year to make sure you have the cash to enter. Look in your favorite
industry magazines for competitions sponsored by manufacturing companies.Winning even an honorable mention in these types of competitions will give you generous national exposure and a somewhat different
venue in which to win and be recognized than the typical local press
you are likely to achieve.
Don’t make the mistake of not caring about awards programs and
taking an aloof attitude.Tooting your own horn may be the most difficult thing for you to do. It’s really hard for some personality types to
actually go up to the podium and graciously accept an award. I
remember the first year I joined with my design-firm partner who is ten
years my junior. He was recognized for a wonderful accomplishment and
given a significant reward. On his way up to the podium, he seemed
embarrassed, looked down at the ground, and practically made an excuse
for himself when he accepted the reward at the microphone.The crowd
is watching you at these events. Learn to say “thank you” with meaning
and clarity, even if it is simple. Enjoy the moment standing before your
competition; sometimes your clients are in the audience, too.
Appearing overly humble will lessen the reward or press recognition
in the viewers’ eyes.They might question why you received the reward
if you did not believe in the work enough yourself.They will invariably
make wrong assumptions about you or the project. Give everyone a
reason to look up to you by showing that you believe in yourself.
Everyone likes to go with a winner.

■

The Interior Designer’s Guide to P RICING, E STIMATING, and B UDGETING

■

(02)5-8 IDG Pricing, Estimating 3/3/05 3:07 PM Page 50

Case Study Interview
A Designer Producing an Interior Design for a Nonprofit Entity:
Karen Painter, Principal, Lorenz Williams, Inc., Dayton, Ohio

Karen Painter is a principal of Lorenz Williams, where she manages the
firm’s interior design projects and has given twenty-five years of service
to the company. She is responsible for managing multidisciplinary
project teams and specializes in architectural interior environments, programming and space planning, functional determination and affinity
analysis, product evaluation for lifecycle costs, and renewable aspects.
She has particular experience in sustainable and environmentally
responsible design.

Q. Briefly describe the scope of your most memorable project completed
for a nonprofit entity.

A. The Marie S. Aull Education Center at Aullwood Audubon Center
and farm was a result of Aullwood’s desire to meet an increasing demand
for nature education programs. The design intent of the project was to
create a facility that blended with its natural surroundings and provide
a stimulating, memorable learning experience for children and adults
alike. The new center is a major expansion of an original eightthousand-square-foot education center that was built around a centuryold, stone and hand-hewed beam barn.The expansion includes two new
wings on either side of the original structure that total thirteen thousand square feet.

Q. What were some of the specific challenges you faced during this project?
A. There were many architectural and engineering challenges—environmental concerns such as site orientation. In response to a lack of
utility and gas service onsite, a geothermal heating and cooling system
was incorporated. Aullwood’s existing well was used, rather than creating a bigger one, by putting holding tanks in the basement and pumping
from there into building areas as needed. Natural lighting is often used
and promoted inside in place of electrical solutions. Operable windows
are used throughout to allow ventilation and cooling. By creating both
indoor and outdoor classrooms (the shape of the building creates outside classrooms, while the indoor classrooms have doors to the outside),
education space was maximized.
Design-wise, there was the need to integrate the “old” with the
“new” so that one would not feel a separation between the existing
building and the new addition. There needed to be a recall of some

(02)5-8 IDG Pricing, Estimating 3/3/05 3:07 PM Page 51

materials and elements that were favorites of longstanding members and
guests of Aullwood.The redwood exterior siding that was removed from
the existing structure, to allow for the expansion, was brought into the
interior finishes and used as wall finish for portions of the classrooms.
Several of the beloved trees on the site had to be removed. Rather than
sacrifice those trees altogether, some were made into lumber used for
the construction, some wood was used to create beautiful handcrafted
tree motif entry doors by a local woodworker. A large boulder was
unearthed during excavation and was used as part of the main reception
counter. Other natural materials such as stone, cork, and bamboo were
also used as interior finish materials to evoke a sense of place.
Flexibility was key for gaining the greatest utilization of space for
dollars spent. Modular wall systems allow for the expansion and division
of the large multipurpose room. Furniture height, as well as configuration, can be altered. Products were selected as a “family” to be interchanged as needed. Classrooms were constructed in different sizes to
match the needs for various educational programs. Trails continue
directly through the building toward the outside, as seen in the Hall of
Wonder.The Window on Wildlife space acts as a gallery that allows the
building to constantly transform itself, much as nature does.

Q. Were there any troublesome issues with regard to the budget, and
how did you overcome them?

A. Aullwood supporters began raising funds for the expansion project
in 1998 because the center’s educational programs had outgrown the
facility. They ran a very successful campaign in the course of two years,
raising $3.7 million through donations from 645 individuals, foundations,
and organizations. Lorenz Williams provided a number of graphic visuals
that assisted in the campaign in addition to numerous events attended by
the project and design architect John Fabelo and various members of the
project team. Some value engineering did occur in the construction phase
of the project, but none impacted the vision of the project.

■

there any residual benefits, such as press coverage or new
client opportunities that resulted from your endeavors?
A. Lorenz Williams received coverage in newspapers, press coverage,
and continues their relationship with the client. The director, Charity
Krueger, is quoted in a publication as saying, “We’re so fortunate that
Lorenz Williams were our architects on this, because they really
caught the heart of what Aullwood stands for.” Charity and the
uniqueness of the building continue to promote Lorenz Williams as

M ORE on VALUE R ATING

Q. Were

The Interior Designer’s Guide to P RICING, E STIMATING, and B UDGETING

■

(02)5-8 IDG Pricing, Estimating 3/3/05 3:07 PM Page 52

each new organization attends. It is also considered to be a model for
other Audubon Centers. The best compliment is that our team is now
working on the expansion and renovation of the farm portion of the
center that will include classrooms, offices for the farm administration,
a teaching and commercial kitchen, and a three-hundred-seat multipurpose room, all surrounded by the farm pastures, outbuildings, and
barn. This project also advanced our firm in “green” sustainable architecture, interior design, and engineering, now being requested by many
of our clients.

Q. Would you do another project for a nonprofit entity?
A. Yes. We have done other projects to date as well, including

the
Carillon Historic Park and the National Aviation Hall of Fame, to name
a couple.

(02)5-8 IDG Pricing, Estimating 3/3/05 3:07 PM Page 53

Fatal Errors

ome clients are notorious for changing their minds for all the
wrong reasons and at all the wrong times. You can charge
clients for changing their minds a million times. A first round of
changes to an original design concept just after the initial presentation is acceptable, at no additional charge to your client;
build this into your quote and just count on it. Sometimes, a
second, third, or—horrifyingly—a fourth round is required.The
industry is inundated with change orders, and it is an absolute
must for you to include a “revisions allowance” in your quotes
or to specify “change order” hourly fees. Generally, any changes
after a third round mean that either you are not communicating
with your client effectively, your client has multiple personalities
(and many of them do), or your client is making its decision by
committee and the committee is too big to agree on anything.

The Changelings
If you have the unfortunate history of most of your clients constantly making changes, then a personal assessment is certainly
due. More often than not, however, if a client is given carte
blanche to make changes, he or she will do so. Set the rules up
front. An absolute requirement to your project-acceptance
repertoire will be the ubiquitous change order form. This form
might be a simple confirmation of the client’s desired changes,
along with a new cost for this revision and a place on the form
for the client to sign off. It could be as simple as setting up a
template that can be printed on your letterhead. Review this
form and procedure with your clients before starting projects,
thus warding off their desire to make alterations.
Clients, justifiably, are allowed to change their minds. What
we as designers need to realize is that, most of the time, client
changes are not meant to bruise our egos or to point out that we

The Interior Designer’s Guide to P RICING, E STIMATING, and B UDGETING

■

(02)5-8 IDG Pricing, Estimating 3/3/05 3:07 PM Page 54

are uncreative or totally off-base with our selections. Remember that
many times client changes come not directly from your client but indirectly from your client’s boss.When changes come from a higher echelon, which can seem as invisible as the Wizard of Oz, it is important to
remember that eventually the Wizard surfaces, and, just like in the
movies, he may not be such a bad guy after all.
The truth of the matter is that the client—unless he has extensive
experience choosing colors, finishes, and textures—most often does not
know if he is going to like something until he sees it. Keep in mind that
there is a time and place for client changes, and it is up to you to set
those ground rules proactively while you are establishing the schedule
for the project at your initial master meeting. Discuss up front the issue
of possible changes that your client may want to make. Be specific about
what these changes could possibly be. Give your client reassurance once
again that while his or her involvement is key to the success of the finished piece, revisions should be made only at certain incremental stages
of the project, which you establish and agree upon together. Changes at
any other stage of the game (after furniture is ordered or walls torn out,
for example) will wreak havoc on your estimate.
Don’t let unreasonable revision charges build up until they become
a towering inferno of disaster.You cannot absorb these charges, and your
client must acknowledge them if they are to be made at all. Many times,
when clients are informed of the costs they will incur to make a significant change at the wrong stage of their project, they will change their
mind (again) and leave the project alone.
For as many times as a client may think he wants to change his mind,
there are as many occasions where a simple dialogue with you might convince him otherwise.Acknowledge the concern, but point out how such
a change might be costly beyond any possible value to be derived from it
(if this is actually the case) and, more important to you, how the change
may actually be undesirable from a design, ergonomic, or aesthetic standpoint. Sometimes, clients want reassurance that they have made the right
choices along the creative way. Often, they are charting unexplored areas,
and their decisions are being scrutinized not only by their customers, but
usually by superiors as well.Your sensitivity to these issues, along with an
ultra-significant patience factor that has been deemed necessary for your
survival in this industry, is vital to your success.
A great example is when a client sees the new color scheme painted
in its lobby or office area and suddenly isn’t sure that you’ve chosen the
right combination—only a few days after he said he loved it and it was
perfect.Your answer should sound something like,“You know, I had the

(02)5-8 IDG Pricing, Estimating 3/3/05 3:07 PM Page 55

same concern about that shade of green myself when I saw the first coat;
but then I realized it was the best choice because of the way the light
floods this room all day, making it a perfectly tranquil solution for a
waiting space. I can promise you this is the best color to use here; and
you chose the right color last Monday. Good job!”
Most of the time, your client simply wants acknowledgment and
validation of his concern.Your explanation then gives him ammunition
if someone else (perhaps his superior) decides to challenge him regarding the same issue. Plus you are reaffirming the decision he made when
he said he loved it a few days before.
Your delivery of these dialogues will get better and better with practice. Once you have the satisfaction of experiencing a client go from
constantly wanting to change the course of things to seeing it your way,
you’ll know that you can achieve your desired creative results—you just
can’t expect to do it all the time.
The following are some ideas for how to handle a client’s unreasonable change requests:
■

■

Make certain that you establish a protocol for change orders with
your client before a project actually begins.
Listen very carefully to what your client is saying; it may not be as
bad as you think.
Be objective. Review your proposal (if you did one) for an outline
of the project’s goals and objectives. Do the client’s changes concur
with those goals and objectives?
Validate your client’s concerns by simply acknowledging them.
This does not necessarily mean that you have to agree with them.
Discuss the issue and endeavor to mutually agree on what the
next step should be. Most often, the next step will be for you to
research additional costs and discuss them with your client as soon
as possible.
Communicate additional costs in writing to clients, and have them
sign a change-order form that acts as an agreement to cover
the surcharges.

■

Providing services that you can’t charge your client for is sure to dishearten you.Your efficiency, and that of the staff members and subcontractors you have chosen to slurp at your overhead, is of constant, utmost
importance. Everyone makes mistakes. Just don’t make the same mistake
more than once and you’ll be on the road to more profitable, enjoyable

FATAL E RRORS

Billing Protocol

The Interior Designer’s Guide to P RICING, E STIMATING, and B UDGETING

■

(02)5-8 IDG Pricing, Estimating 3/3/05 3:07 PM Page 56

self-employment. Taboos that you cannot ethically charge your client
for are things like ordering the wrong paint colors or finishes; making
item-number errors from catalogs or price lists when ordering furniture, lighting, or materials; using unauthorized copies of software programs or poorly maintained computer systems that create problems;
suffering the dreaded “fatal error” computer bomb; not backing up or
saving your computer work; and misdirecting a subcontractor, supplier,
or freelancer you have hired to help you complete the job.
A very difficult task is to train your staff members to take personal
responsibility for their mistakes. The advent of the computer as a
design/production/spreadsheet planning tool in our industry has added
a significant amount of responsibility to the designer’s already heavy
load of multitasking; thus, the opportunity arises for more mistakes on
the technical side. Employees should constantly be updated on new
ways of doing things, and also be monitored for costly errors that reduce
the firm’s profitability.
I have found that biting the bullet and paying for employees’ mistakes without disclosing the monetary amounts to said employees results
in even more errors. A staff member can quickly prove his or her
loyalty, efficiency, and worth to the firm by reducing the frequency of
mistakes once he has been enlightened about the occurrence and how
much it has cost the firm. A practice I have recently put into place is to
reward employees with a small bonus every month that goes by without
their making errors that cost the firm time and money.
The old adage that hindsight is 20/20 comes into play in yet another
arena:You have a hunch that adding more to the project will please the
client and pay off. Often, you’ll be right, but your thinking will be
wrong in some of those cases, and you really can’t charge the clients for
things they didn’t ask for or agree to.
But it can be great when you do take the risk and it does pay off! There
have been several occasions in which I quoted a client a price for a
specific project and decided on my own accord to enhance the project by
adding time and, on occasion, even money to make that project better.
A perfect example is a textile design I recently created for a new
client whom I have known personally for years but never worked with
professionally. This woman is quite well known in our region because
she is married to a legendary actor and she herself is quite philanthropic
and community-oriented. However, she is very sensitive to people
wanting to work with her just because she is wealthy, and she is almost
paranoid about wondering if she is being taken advantage of where fees
are concerned.

(02)5-8 IDG Pricing, Estimating 3/3/05 3:07 PM Page 57

FATAL E RRORS
■

Upon her request, I designed a carpet for her family room.While I
was designing, and with the rich mahogany details prevailing in the
beams and bookcases in the room, I couldn’t help but think of a contrasting pattern that would work well for pillows, as well as a smaller
carpet for the entry area to the room. I took the time to create the
designs and had a service bureau print them out to scale—which was
costly. When I showed her the final carpet design I surprised her with
the other patterns, and her resulting delight is now in my profit margin.
I was right! In this case, producing the extra patterns was not a stark risk
because I did know the woman personally and had her trust. Use your
intuition to decide when to take the extra gamble of spending your
time to increase not only your bottom line but your portfolio and, probably most importantly, customer satisfaction.
Another example is a program I am creating for a local museum that
has a national audience. My original quote and presentation were to
create a reproduction of an original antique textile that cannot be
repaired and one the museum wants to archive. The cost of doing an
original textile can be overwhelming at times—especially one of this
size and detail—and add to that the fact that this client is a nonprofit
entity. My solution was to turn the project into a fundraiser for the
organization.We will produce a series of one hundred signed reproductions and offer them to the museum’s benefactors. Not only will the
needed reproduction be paid for, the resulting funds collected will benefit the museum and be lasting heirloom purchases for the patrons.
I will add a high-profile museum to my portfolio base and hopefully meet some new clients through the benefactors’ promotion—
two big payoffs. Plus, it will be fun to follow the fundraising as it
continues, attend the installation premiere, and interact with an
entirely new group of acquaintances I wouldn’t have had the opportunity to meet otherwise.
There is a tendency in our industry for egos to get in the way of
practicality and reality. The introduction of technology as a design and
production tool presents a perplexing problem. The incessant, looming
question is, how much will we use technology to design and in what
format should we show things to our clients? Most clients have the
comical perception that if you have a computer you can just “change
this and that and move this here and change this color there and try
moving this wall to see what happens,” on and on into oblivion.
Theoretically, this may be true, but the real world comes back with
a bucket of cold water in the face, reminding us that we can’t be everything to everybody, as we sometimes imagine we can in those

The Interior Designer’s Guide to P RICING, E STIMATING, and B UDGETING

■

(02)5-8 IDG Pricing, Estimating 3/3/05 3:07 PM Page 58

omnipresent rose-colored glasses! The answer is simple: Don’t make it
hard on yourself. Do what you do best, and do it all the time. If your
strong point is interior wall coverings and only interior wall coverings,
provide your client with only that service. Talk to vendors about your
weaknesses, and at least educate yourself enough to offer a referral
service to clients who need to buy services that you don’t provide. Refer
to the full-service concept earlier in this book, make your decision
about what services you do and don’t want to provide, and move on.
You can always add services to your list; it’s harder to take them away.
Realizing your strengths will reward you not only with profitability but
also with a great reputation within your chosen niche.
There are five common faux pas that you should take responsibility
for and never charge your client:
1. Purchasing the wrong color, finish, or pattern from a vendor.

Make sure you understand restocking fees and proofread, proofread,
proofread your written, detailed purchase orders.
2. Forgetting to change the color of something (usually paint) that
your client specifically requested.
3. Ordering too much fabric, wallpaper, paint, or floor covering.You
might pad your estimates for supplies of this type by 15 percent to cover
overages. Exact measurements are sometimes difficult to determine and
it’s better to have too much than not enough—especially when it is possible for a manufacturer to discontinue a color or pattern in the middle
of a project.
4. Miscommunicating change-order status to your subcontractors.
Make sure that if you are responsible for your subcontractors’ productivity (and bills) that you are on the job frequently to explain changes,
anticipate problems, etc.
5. Having the finishing materials or furnishings delivered to the
wrong address. Don’t laugh—this happens often. To avoid arguments
and incurring additional freight costs, have your client confirm the
delivery location(s) in writing.

You Gotta Be You
Owning your own interior design business and developing your personal ethics systems are huge challenges in their own right. Don’t be
too hard on yourself, but always be true to yourself. Living under false
pretenses is very stressful and can literally make you sick. You must
know your own process and that of your staff members to be truly productive and profitable. Dealing with money and issues regarding

(02)5-8 IDG Pricing, Estimating 3/3/05 3:07 PM Page 59

pricing is delicate subject matter. Money is a weird figment of our
society. It’s intimate, and everyone handles it differently and has different concepts of right and wrong. The process is an individual one,
and this book has been designed to broaden your own awareness of
what might work for you.
When a client says, “I spoke with such-and-such design firm, and it
can do my project for $3,000 less than the estimate you gave me,” your
first response should be to ask whether your client is comparing apples
to apples. If you are a multiperson firm and you are being quoted out
against a freelancer or small studio, your rates will obviously be higher,
and you can’t be expected to compete in such an arena. If your firm was
quoted out against another multiperson firm, comparably talented, and
you feel that you properly assessed the requirements of the project
before submitting your estimate, then tell the client they have a good
deal going with the other firm, and you’d like to see how the project
comes out, thank you very much!
You are setting a dangerous precedent if you lower your price pointblank.You will always be expected to lower your prices with that particular client, and you will get a reputation all over the place for doing
so—clients talk, you know. Protect yourself. Don’t feel like you have to
get every job you estimate.
It comes down to the simple matter of who the client really wants
to work with and your ability to look at the matter in a strictly professional way. Never put yourself in a defensive position or frame of mind.
Don’t ever take these situations personally—if you do, you will be committing yourself to straitjacket city in a matter of months.

Time Management: The Key to Your Survival

FATAL E RRORS
■

Another mandatory aspect of a successful business that makes you and
every right-brainer cringe is accepting the concept of time management. That’s for accountants, you say? I used to think so too. I’m not
going to frustrate you with loads of information that you probably
won’t take the time to read anyway. Just please know that time management goes hand in hand with project management and with the “discipline” thing that’s so difficult for us designers to commit to.
I finally found the one time management tool that totally changed
my life—I mean totally—when my dear employee Kathy Madden
forced me to buy one of those day planners. Before I joined the multitude of day-planner users, I had piles of papers on, shoved in, and
stacked knee-high around my desk. I thought those planners were for
geeks—certainly not for designers.And why would I want to spend over

The Interior Designer’s Guide to P RICING, E STIMATING, and B UDGETING

■

(02)5-8 IDG Pricing, Estimating 3/3/05 3:07 PM Page 60

$30 for some notebook pages that I would never use anyway, and
another $100 for a leather-bound carrier that I didn’t like the look of?
Dear Kathy practically bound and gagged me as she ever so patiently
showed me my new apparatus and how to use it.
Ten years later, I am a reformed and better-organized woman. I go
everywhere with my day planner.They come in many different sizes and
name brands—and you’ll find that one name brand’s carrier is not compatible with the holes punched in the other name brand’s calendar
pages. Getting over this initial frustration will be easy once you are able
to open yourself up to the wonderful world of pre-organization.
That’s right—someone else has already figured it out for you!
There, before your very eyes, are sectioned-off pages that include every
hour of the day for your appointment reminders, plenty of space to
take notes (and draw pictures), other goodies like last month’s and this
month’s calendars in full view, and any month within a five-year period
at your fingertips.
What about the infamous electronic PDAs (personal data assistants)
that are everywhere, which people use to beam each other megainformation, games, stock quotes, and e-mail messages? I think they’re
great. As a matter of fact, I have used one before and plan to get one of
the latest models as soon as I have enough time to research the one that
suits my needs.
I can promise you that a planner will change the way you do (or
don’t) organize yourself, your clients, your vendors, and so on. It will be
a tremendous aid to use at your master meeting and while determining
project and personal schedules. Everyone on my staff now has a planner,
and it has made a big difference—everybody knows what is expected
and when. Ultimately, putting these deadlines and other details in writing
in the planner’s calendar format—especially if you actually take it to
planning and creative sessions—opens up your own creativity.You’re not
bogged down with all that left-brain stuff, because it’s all in your book!

Know Your Work Process!
In the world of organization, knowing your work process—how you get
things done—is another significant factor. If you know your own
methods and can use them to your advantage, organizing yourself and
others will be substantially easier. A lot of our work processes were
taught to us in design school or college by professors who set up class
assignments with schedules that suited their work processes.You may not
have given it a second thought until now, but do so with me, and you’ll
see what I mean.

(02)5-8 IDG Pricing, Estimating 3/3/05 3:07 PM Page 61

Answer the questions below as specifically as possible.
Do you like to do a lot of thumbnails before you begin a project?
If so, how many, and how much time do you like to spend on
each one?
■ Do you like to do research before you begin designing to get a true
and accurate sense of every possibility?
■ After you have been assigned a project, do you like to let it swirl
around in your head for several days before you begin?
■ Do you want to be part of every innuendo of the architectural
layout, elevations, and cornice details?
Or:
■ Do you like to start a project right away, spending little time on
thumbnails?
■ Do you get frustrated when a client asks you to show more than one
concept?
■ Do you find that you have an intuitive sense regarding many
different kinds of client tastes and what will appeal to each of them?
■ Do you like to have the architectural elevations already finished so
you can fill in with colors and textures right away?
■

There is no right or wrong answer. These questions are simply a way to
pinpoint the methods that appeal to your sense of how to be productive.
Answering affirmatively to the first four questions shows that you
come at design from a more practical, fact-oriented basis. You’re the
type who likes to turn over every stone before you pick one up and hold
it for a while. The methods suggested by the last four questions appeal
to design types who get frustrated with a lot of preliminary tasks and who
like to dive into a project right away.

FATAL E RRORS
■

Realistically acknowledging your answers to the sidebar questions
above will be a great help in setting up your project schedules in the
future. Using what you have just learned, you will know yourself better
and can therefore establish with your clients the sequence of necessary
events for your work to be timely and effective. If you have a staff, ask
them these questions as well. Know that if you are going to require
someone’s help to complete a project, you may have to set up the
schedule to fit a very different work process (or style) than your own.

The Interior Designer’s Guide to P RICING, E STIMATING, and B UDGETING

■

(02)5-8 IDG Pricing, Estimating 3/3/05 3:07 PM Page 62

This whole work process thing came to me while teaching design
theory at the University of Dayton several years ago. My own work
process is mostly that of diving right in and creating a visual theme right
away. So, when I assigned a portfolio-type project to a group of seniors,
requiring only five thumbnails before moving on to the design
enhancement and production phases, I heard this huge resounding sigh
of relief from about half of the class. I thought five thumbnails sounded
like a lot. It turned out that my colleague down the hall, who taught
another portfolio-level design class, required a minimum of thirty
thumbnails on his projects.
My first inclination was to panic; I had never taught this level of
design students, and I felt that maybe I was not pushing them enough.
What I soon learned was that the students who needed to do more than
five thumbnails did so on their own before they could move on. About
half of the students did just fine with only five thumbnail concepts.
Grades and the quality level of the finished projects were not affected
by how much planning or “predesign” work went into a piece. My colleague’s students’ projects were no better than my students’ projects. It
simply boiled down to two different methods—or work processes—of
performing the same tasks.
You’d think that this teaching experience would have shown me
something about scheduling projects for my own staff. But I hadn’t
really learned my lesson.Very shortly afterward, I had the great fortune
of being able to hire a very talented illustrator-designer who had
recently graduated on an art scholarship from a well-known university.
I had seen his portfolio about six months previously but did not have
any job openings. A significant growth in accounts offered me the
opportunity to seek out this young man and offer him a job.
About two months after my art director and I had enthusiastically
agreed that this young man was the perfect member to add to our team,
we began to have second thoughts. He seemed to have trouble meeting
deadlines and all of a sudden seemed unsure of himself.The quality level
in his once-incredible illustrations and designs seemed to drop way off.
We were frustrated, and so was he. The straw that finally broke the
camel’s back was when we gave him the opportunity to draw some
illustrations for a new client’s capabilities brochure. He worked solidly
for one week and then over a weekend, with very little to show for his
time. We met him on a Sunday (the project was due for the client’s
review on Tuesday) and couldn’t believe how little we saw. I frantically
called in two freelancers, who responded appropriately, and we got the
job done on time.

(02)5-8 IDG Pricing, Estimating 3/3/05 3:07 PM Page 63

FATAL E RRORS
■

This employee was really depressed, and so were we.When my anger
and disappointment had subsided enough for me to talk with him about
what had happened, the skies suddenly parted and light shone down
into my blinded eyes.We were all relieved to realize that it was a simple
matter of his having a different work process.While my art director and
I have a quick-go-to-it process, this staff member likes to plan his work
with a lot of pre-concepts and a comprehensive idea of what the final
project is going to look like before he can really get started.
This story is a great example of just how important it is for design
employers to understand the vast differences in their individual employees’ needs in order to get the most creative output from them.
When you look at interior design as you would a manufacturing
process, it’s easy to see how different methods of operation will affect
not only the end product but the efficiency within the implementation
process as well.
Project management, from a creativity and organizational standpoint, can benefit greatly when the principal (or principals) of a firm
oversees all projects. This doesn’t mean that you will have to overencumber yourself with work tasks—quite the contrary. By overseeing
projects, I mean that you should approve each project at every significant stage of the growth process. Study any thumbnails or pre-concepts
with the “heavy planners” on your staff. Review and approve all elevations whether your firm or an architectural firm is producing them.
Approve all presentation materials and the theme for the project. Every
phase will need your affirmative nod, including approving color palettes,
textures, finishes and furnishings, artwork, and so on, making any suggestions for improvement to your junior and senior designers (or to
your clients), before purchase orders are prepared.
By overseeing projects in this way, you will better understand what
endeavors went into each phase of the design from a time-creativity,
problem-and-solution standpoint.You will be more respected by your
associates and your clients if you have a general overall knowledge of
each element of a project. If you’re the principal of a firm or studio,
your capabilities for discernment are more developed than those of
your support staff. If you become out of touch with a project, you will
also lose control of it, and the end result may be something that is not
up to your standards.
As your firm grows, it will be exceedingly difficult for you to oversee
each and every project produced by your firm.The challenge will be to
find that special senior designer you trust enough to give him or her
authority similar to your own.To this day, the most difficult task I have

The Interior Designer’s Guide to P RICING, E STIMATING, and B UDGETING

■

(02)5-8 IDG Pricing, Estimating 3/3/05 3:07 PM Page 64

ever faced as the owner of a firm was to find just the right person to
help me take on the most significant task of overseeing projects.
It’s like a marriage: you trust your partner to make important decisions in your absence.You learn immediately that if your partner doesn’t
do things just like you do, it will be hard to accept her decisions, and
you learn how to stand up to clients in situations in which you personally had nothing to do with the issue at hand. I know that some principals never find the right person to accomplish the ultra-important tasks.
After running my firm for nine years, I had the great fortune of meeting
the person who became my trusted partner and creative comrade.
Either Chris or I approved every project that came into our studios.
It got really crazy at times, but we both knew that it was imperative for
one of us to approve projects internally before our clients saw them.The
result was that each project benefited from critique by more than one
creative eye (that is, by the designer who created the work and by either
Chris or me), and perhaps more importantly, it was organized and managed within the discipline of the internal system we had created.
Consistency in how we produced and presented our projects was the
key to our firm’s “signature” within the market.

Your Client Is Your Partner
Treating your client somewhat as you might a business partner will help
both of you create successful projects. None of us likes to feel that we
are being controlled by someone else. Simply offering comments like,
“I’d really like to know how you visualize this place before we get
started,” or,“Your input is really important to the success of this space,”
psychologically makes your client feel like a significant contributor to
your design solution.
Even if you don’t really like the client’s ideas, make sure you listen
carefully without interrupting when your client is voicing an opinion
or presenting an idea.You will make your client feel great whenever you
can offer, “That’s a great idea!” If you would like to change or add to
their idea, or offer an alternative, try to add something like “And it
would also be great to blah, blah, blah.”Words like and, also, and in addition to are inclusive of the client’s ideas. Don’t use words like but, only, or
just; these are negative.Your message will be more readily accepted if you
use positive words.

Develop a System That Works for You
Knowing yourself and your staff ’s processes will be the foundation for
the type of project management system you need, and will also depend

(02)5-8 IDG Pricing, Estimating 3/3/05 3:07 PM Page 65

FATAL E RRORS
■

heavily on the size and complexity of your business. If it’s just you, or you
and one or two other people, it’s easiest to implement a simple system; I
recommend the “job-jacket” system. For a larger group of people, you’ll
want to involve everyone in devising and implementing a system that
works for all the individuals involved. (Why group involvement is much
more important than the details of the system you eventually decide to
adopt is discussed below.
The best system I’ve found for small groups—which I define as you
working alone or with one or two other people—is the job-jacket system.
A job jacket is simply an oversized envelope that holds every element
belonging to that particular project.The external job jacket itself can be
reused many times until it falls apart—your clients will never see it.
The outside of the job jacket usually has a clear pocket of some type
that you can use for the job’s log number, the project name, a list of
everything that’s inside, and client information, such as name, address,
and phone number. Or this information can be written directly on the
envelope itself. Inside the job jacket you should keep pre-concepts;
thumbnails; color, fabric and finish swatches; all photos and illustrations;
purchase orders; time sheets; and anything else that your client originally
gave to you when you accepted the project.
Job jackets should always be kept in a central location where
everyone can access them. At the end of the day, all items should be put
back into their specified job jackets. The next morning’s work is then
started without employees wondering where certain project elements
are. This simple but effective system works great and is the most
common organizational system used by small studios.
Seldom does a firm open its doors with a huge, award-winning staff,
crème de la crème clientele, and an overflow of working capital in the
bank. If you decide to start a studio, and it grows until you need to hire
several full-time support-staff members and then several more, you’ll
need more than the job-jacket system to keep things organized and
flowing comfortably.
This may sound odd, but the best way to create a strong project
management system for a larger group of people is to get everyone
involved in both the creation and the establishment of the system.
This is at least as important as what kind of system you eventually
establish! By getting everyone involved, everyone takes ownership of
the system, and everyone has a say in its development.Work processes
of all types will be acknowledged when a group makes a team effort
in putting together a project management policy in which every
member will participate.

The Interior Designer’s Guide to P RICING, E STIMATING, and B UDGETING

■

(02)5-8 IDG Pricing, Estimating 3/3/05 3:07 PM Page 66

When the boss tries to put the so-called perfect system in place, the
support staff tends to hold grudges or find excuses for why they aren’t
working. But when the support staff team up with their leader in a joint
effort, a clear winner emerges—the group itself as a whole.
Once you and your group have established a project management
system that everyone can assume some level of ownership for, it should
pretty much be left to run on autopilot.You should have checks and balances set up along the way so that you or another key authoritative
person will be overseeing and approving projects as they pass through
the phases you have deemed necessary for such review and approval.
Ongoing clients will become a part of your project management
system through osmosis. They will know from experience when and
how to expect things from your firm.You will have developed a consistency that you, your staff, and your clients will become familiar with.
And high staff morale will ensue because you have allowed everyone to
be a part of building the machine that will drive the team’s organization
and ultimately its creativity. Learn to tie those two thoughts together
repeatedly, and make them your mantra: “organization, creativity.”
I know it all seems like a lot of work, especially when you can’t possibly see yourself being this detailed or this organized. I totally understand. But trust that your professional and personal lives will be much
better for it all. Picture this monster inside of you that is the bad, disorganized, and out-of-control person.Then, picture the calmer, more productive, in-control person.You might not even be the slightest bit aware
of this second option. Now you have the tools to meet that awareness
face to face.

(02)5-8 IDG Pricing, Estimating 3/3/05 3:07 PM Page 67

Five Time- and Project-Management Tips
1.
2.

Consistently maintain time sheets.
Plan your days so that you can spend at least two hours at a time
focusing on design and production tasks. Fragmented time is
counterproductive.
Make and return your phone calls at the same time every day; try
initiating calls first thing in the morning for an hour and then
returning calls between 1:30 and 2:30 in the afternoon. You’ll find
greater success in reaching your parties at these hours, resulting in
some nice blocks of time for planning or productive sessions. Don’t
set up appointments for yourself during these periods, and inform
your staff that you are not to be interrupted at these times.
Be aware that job burnout occurs very often in your industry—both
with designers and subcontractors. Encourage staff to take planned
vacation days, consider giving an extra day off on holiday weekends, and think about closing your office or studio for at least a
week (or two) between Christmas and New Year’s.
Set realistic schedules for projects, and stick to them. Hire freelancers or approve overtime hours to keep projects on track. Falling
behind will result in a domino effect of being behind all of the time
and becoming notorious for missing deadlines with clients and
vendors—a really big no-no in our industry!

FATAL E RRORS
■

The Interior Designer’s Guide to P RICING, E STIMATING, and B UDGETING

■

(02)5-8 IDG Pricing, Estimating 3/3/05 3:07 PM Page 68

Case Study Interview
A True-Life Lesson in Error Management: Shawn Taddey, Principal,
Senior and Junior Designer, Administrator

Shawn Taddey is the sole principal at Taddey + Karlin. She focuses on
in-depth, full-service residential interior design in Beverly Hills,
California, employing a senior and junior designer along with one
administrative person.

Q. Do you develop “partnerships” with your client in any way? How
does that work to your benefit—or not?
A. It depends on the client, because some like to keep things strictly
professional and a lot of clients make you their new best friends and you
hear about every bit of their life and more than you would ever want
to know!
We are very sensitive to what type of relationship makes the client
feel comfortable; that, in essence, is the true art of being a designer—
assessing what the clients want and how to make them feel taken care
of. It’s just like dating—you figure out what they like and what turns
them on.
My firm also ends up lots of times being their personal manager
(because our firm is so obviously efficient). We sometimes manage
their entire lives; I’ve hired shrinks and weight trainers for clients! I’ve
even done Christmas shopping for clients. We interview and hire
maids, then we groom them and teach the maids how to take care of
the clients’ house. Some clients really get addicted to it. It’s kind of
hard to wean them off when our project is done but it works out very
nicely because they get an entire package from start to finish and
there is a lot of trust established which gives us more freedom to do
good work.

Q. Do you have an established protocol for change orders?
A. Yes, absolutely. We document everything constantly and

in great
detail, but not only internally.We also demand it from our subcontractors.When a client wants to make a change, we review it with the client
and the contractor together to make sure everyone is on the same page.
Designers need to go to business school. I see so many designers fail
because they simply do not know how to handle these situations with
a firm hand. They can have the most beautiful taste in the world and
then lose money because they do not know how to execute changes
and issues like this that arise in our business every day.

(02)5-8 IDG Pricing, Estimating 3/3/05 3:07 PM Page 69

If we disagree with a change a client wants to make, we show him
the end result on paper to make sure he knows what he’s thinking and
saying. One of my great assets is that I can draw; it has been a major
factor in my career success. I mean—designers who can’t draw—
goodbye! If I start talking to a client about a room I can draw it for him
in a minute on a piece of paper and he can see it and choose it. If he
wants to make a change I show it to him instantly. Art Center was the
best education I could have had because it taught me the drawing and
painting and full design theory that I use every day. Designers simply
have to take drawing classes, in my opinion!

Q. What special time management techniques do you use to keep projects on track—both from a completion deadline standpoint and your
own profitability standpoint? Does your staff also use this system?
A. All of us use a project status report format and a daily time sheet to
log every detail down to every five minutes of our projects. Again, I
cannot stress enough the fact that designers must have business skills and
be very diligent about the details with regard to how they and their staff
members use their time, making sure their clients are charged for all of it.
We are very critical in how we present the scope of our interior and
architectural design services initially to our clients.We specify every minute
detail of our services, the purchases we will be making and what we can
and cannot be responsible for throughout the duration of the project.

Q. Is there a particular system you use to bring projects in and then
track them throughout their duration?

A. The most important part of our system is doing our homework up-

FATAL E RRORS

front to make sure we have everything outlined, costs are detailed, and
fees and markups are explained thoroughly from day one. Clients do
not like surprises. Our initial contract is very intense and I like to personally review every aspect of the contract with the clients to make
sure they are on board with everything and understand it all. I do not
assume anything about my clients even if they have worked with other
designers. I even explain, for example, that fabrics have varying
degrees of fading over a period of time and [from] exposure to sun or
light. I make sure they initial every page of the contract as we review
it. Our projects are very large and even a “small” mistake can be very
costly to me if there is a misunderstanding; so we get the nitty-gritty
done up front and then we can move in and change their lives—in a
good way!

■

The Interior Designer’s Guide to P RICING, E STIMATING, and B UDGETING

■

(02)5-8 IDG Pricing, Estimating 3/3/05 3:07 PM Page 70

Q. You have a lot of experience in the design industry. Has your own
work process changed—through personal awareness, using technology,
or both? How does your own understanding of that process make you
more efficient?
A. We are pretty conventional in our approach to design. Like I mentioned earlier, drawing has been critical to my success and being able to
think fast and produce solutions immediately. Designers will ultimately
have their biggest successes if they can do this and if they make sure they
are confident with their business management skills. If they are all creative and have no business knowledge they really need to take some
business administration courses; and it’s so easy to do this now with
community colleges offering so many alternatives.

(02)5-8 IDG Pricing, Estimating 3/3/05 3:07 PM Page 71

Pricing Options

know you have spent a lot of time and energy in establishing
your hourly rate and learning about value pricing. But when
it comes to operating your own business, creativity in your
pricing structures can be just as important as the creativity in
your portfolio.

Brokering
I’ll never forget exactly when and how the idea of “brokering”
came to fruition in my business. After my car accident and the
subsequent restructuring of my business, my soon-to-be husband Joel and I were brainstorming on my recent lack of profitability. Since I was the primary salesperson at the time, reducing
my overhead because of lack of volume was mandatory.
Joel’s closer scrutiny of my books showed some months with
huge sales and other months with less than 10 percent of those
sales. I explained to my pragmatic, number-crunching,
attorney-guru-fiancé that the huge sales reflected jobs that
resulted in equally huge subcontractor services. “Well, that’s
simple,” he replied unnervingly.“Why don’t you act as a broker
for those services?”
I began to wonder why I had ever agreed to marry such an
uncreative, left-brained kind of guy. Not only had I never heard
of brokering in our industry, it sounded like a dirty word that
was filled with pinpoint oxford cloth shirts shouting indiscernible words on Wall Street. Little did I know that it was soon
to be one of the most creative ways to generate consistent profitability and peace of mind.
Joel encouraged me to call a close friend of mine who was
also a general contractor and discuss the possibilities of brokering. The idea was to work like this: I would continue to offer
full service to my clients by providing design management,

The Interior Designer’s Guide to P RICING, E STIMATING, and B UDGETING

■

(02)5-8 IDG Pricing, Estimating 3/3/05 3:07 PM Page 72

coordination, and quality control (which was very important to me). I
would still obtain quotes from subcontractors and include their prices
in my client’s estimate, with my normal markup fee (we’ll go over this
on the next page).
The only difference was that the subcontractors would bill my client
directly, include my markup fee, and then send me a check for my
marked-up amount after my client paid him.The beauty of this plan is
that all at once, your subcontractors owe you money! Suddenly, your
books are consistent every month, reflecting your actual billing performance more realistically. And you don’t have to worry about your
client paying you on time so that you can pay your printer on time.You
can also use this system for purchasing materials and furnishings from
vendors; simply have the vendors bill your client directly with your
markup fee.
This system also leaves you absolutely no opportunity for the occasional temptation to spend the money collected from your client for
your huge subcontracting bills on something other than what they were
intended for.Too often, businesses of all types get into “robbing Peter to
pay Paul” and fall dangerously behind in their obligations to Mary, even
though they had every intention to make up the difference through
increased revenues or better cash-flow management. Don’t ever let this
happen to you.
Of course, there are certain clients and situations for which you will
want to absorb the paperwork and details of significant outside costs.
Some large companies issue only one blanket purchase order for a
project, and if you claim to be full service, you may need to be responsible for the entire project, including hefty printing charges. But at least
50 percent of the time, the brokerage concept has worked very successfully for me.
Quite surprisingly, our vendors love it, too, and most of them are
now encouraging other firms and agencies to operate in the same
manner. It’s an efficient way to handle large amounts of money and be
able to look at your business volume more realistically.Vendor trust is an
absolute must, but to this day—seven years later—I have never had even
the smallest problem with the implementation of this system.
Most clients will welcome receiving the subcontractors’ invoices
separately from their design services invoice. Subcontractors usually bill
two to three times during the project, and in many cases this will extend
the payment period for your client, because your own invoice should be
in their hands just after your initial design concepts are approved, and
then weekly thereafter.Typically, I tell clients that we prefer billing them

(02)5-8 IDG Pricing, Estimating 3/3/05 3:07 PM Page 73

for our services while asking the subcontractors to do the same. I
explain to them that we do quote two to three comparable subcontractors and always choose the best one for the project depending upon
price and quality. Disclosing the actual brokerage procedure is usually
not necessary. If clients ask, I certainly tell them that the subcontractor
discounts the work and uses us as a broker—which is true—and it has
never created a problem. Generally, the client wants and appreciates the
full service.
If the client wants us to bill everything and carry complete administrative and supervisory management of all outside services, we add a
project-management fee to cover our production manager’s billable
hourly rate as well as the typical markups.

Markups

P RICING O PTIONS
■

Everyone knows the concept of retail markup.The corner grocery store
buys lemons for a dime a piece and sells them three for a dollar.Your
favorite department store buys Levi’s for $16 and sells them to you for
the everyday low price of $34.99, and so on.Well, every business has its
markup standards, and the interior design business is no exception.
Consider the substantial cost of supplies required for a presentation,
for example. Many times, FedEx charges are incurred for obtaining samples, expensive and large color printouts, presentation boards, and so on.
Or, if you are buying furnishings for a client, you need to be aware that
there is a universal standard of marking up these costs. I had been running my design firm for almost two years before I came to this heightened level of awareness one day while having lunch with a business
mentor. Hopefully, you’re finding out about this earlier in the process
than I did!
The most common markup in the interior design world is 20 percent; every firm I interviewed used that amount as a base and went up
or down from there. On smaller projects, many firms charge a 25percent markup to their clients for outside costs.This simply makes it all
worthwhile and recoups some of your nonbillable office manager’s time
for all the work, like invoicing and purchase-order management for the
necessary supplies and vendors required to complete the job.
Usually, the only time markups go down is when the quantity of furnishings and finishes is so large that it is totally unreasonable to charge
20 percent, because it places the entire project in jeopardy of being
monstrously over budget. The perfect examples of this are projects like
entire floors of offices for a specific company, large homes where multiple rooms are being designed, new homes, or businesses. Project sizes

The Interior Designer’s Guide to P RICING, E STIMATING, and B UDGETING

■

(02)5-8 IDG Pricing, Estimating 3/3/05 3:07 PM Page 74

that exceed finished costs of around $100,000 typically see a lower range
in markup amounts. Once again, the value theory comes to light, and it
is necessary for you to make the final decision. Sometimes, putting even
a 1-percent markup on a project can increase your profitability substantially without taking the client over budget on their unit cost.

Markups are a great way to make a nice, ethical profit margin, on things
like furnishings in particular—especially when you have pre-negotiated
a lower retail price than other designers might obtain because you have
established a high-volume relationship with a manufacturer. Use the following checklist to remind yourself of typical things to mark up while
you’re doing your estimate or projected budget:
Supplies needed to complete a job—special presentation boards,

colored papers, and laminating
Any outside, service bureau fees—high-resolution output, color

lasers, color copies, and oversized outputs
Laser copies from in-house equipment
CDs or other hardware required for backup of client files
Photography required before and after the project
Supplies and materials needed for photo props
Subcontractor fees
All design/building materials
Furnishings, lighting, window coverings, accessories, etc.

In essence, it’s anything that you are buying to complete a project.

Management Fees
There are pros and cons to letting your client be the one to manage the
painters and other large outside suppliers. Sometimes, clients want to
manage things like who will paint their walls, who will build their credenzas, who will provide the flooring, and who will perform the actual,
major tasks that bring a project to its final peak (or demise).While some
clients really do know how to buy these services, others know just
enough to cause real trouble.Your job is to discern among the multitude and decide accordingly.

(02)5-8 IDG Pricing, Estimating 3/3/05 3:07 PM Page 75

Since some clients will be adamant about managing these matters, your challenge is to decide whether or not this control scenario
is agreeable with your own process. If the contractors the client
wants to use are part of your own pool of known subcontractors,
then there is typically no problem. Sometimes, clients who buy their
own services will even respect your suggestions and referrals. In any
case, you should ask for a management fee to go through the punchlisting (a simple checklist of issues and problems that need correcting
by the contractors) and quality-control phases of your project. After
all, if your clients respect you enough to hire your design services,
they should want your blessing along the way to ensure integrity of
the project.
If you’re full service, don’t be afraid to say no to a client’s project that
won’t pay you a management fee to go on the job site or allow your
input on color choices or contractor details. Both you and the client are
asking for trouble when it comes to important quality issues in the final
phases. Many good designs rely on finishing techniques, such as varnishes, paints, installation, and other industry craftsmanship that simply
cannot be judged until the final stages of a job. If an alteration needs to
be made during these last moments of your projects, and you are not
present to help make the decisions of what gets improved upon and
how, chances are your design will be sacrificed unnecessarily, to your
total chagrin.

Square-Footage Rates

P RICING O PTIONS

Quite often, clients might ask you to quote projects based on square
footage.This is a dangerous request because it shows that this particular client is probably accustomed to “canned” design and doesn’t
really want or understand customization. Perhaps he would prefer
the services of someone else. If you were really efficient and kept
using the same types of finishes, wall and floor coverings, and furniture manufacturers, you might be able to pull this off.You could also
agree to such a fee structure if you were responsible, for example, for
a group of condominiums with the same floor plan within the
same development.
While the “square footage” term won’t be heard on a daily basis,
clients who prefer this pricing method might expect you to respond
to it—and you can, if you educate yourself up front. Take the last six
projects you have completed that are in the same category from a

■

The Interior Designer’s Guide to P RICING, E STIMATING, and B UDGETING

■

(02)5-8 IDG Pricing, Estimating 3/3/05 3:07 PM Page 76

services and quality standpoint, add up the total costs for all six (this
will include furnishings, markups, etc.), then divide that amount by
the total square footage of all six projects. Make sure to compare the
right projects to the quality level of design this particular client is
asking you for.
Working on a volume project that has a square footage fee attached
to it can be quite profitable and rewarding. Since this appears to be the
age of condo development and condo conversions (every baby boomer
retirement city in the nation is converting apartment buildings to
condos), getting a few square-footage pricing projects under your belt
as examples will give prospective clients the green light to hire your
services.These production-style projects can be a good way to keep cash
flowing and staff people consistently busy.
The easiest way to determine your square-footage rate is to ask
clients what they are used to paying. I have found that 75 percent of
the time, clients in this category are willing to pay more than I would
have asked—so, in that case, you’ve got a win-win situation and everybody’s happy!
If a client is hesitant to give you a rate, you’ll need Intuition 101
once again. First, decide on the value of the job.Then, using your newly
found algebra skills, try to determine how long the project will take you
to produce, and multiply that by your hourly rate. Divide your totaled
amount by the square footage of the project. How does it compare to
your preferred rate methodology? It is not unusual to charge a squarefootage rate separately from the supplies, subcontractor, and furnishings
pricing, plus markup.
If the client thinks your square-footage rate is too high, share your
difficulty in establishing this rate with him or her and see if you can
come to an agreement that you both feel good about. Don’t let yourself get backed into a corner; but the sooner you can find a comfort
level for discussing money issues with your clients, the better for both
of you.
Painters, wall finishers, and flooring experts will most typically quote
in square-footage terms, and this is probably the reason for your client
asking you to quote projects this way in the first place. Don’t hesitate to
give combined quotes for square-footage design work included with
other associated fees that simply do not fit this structure. Hardly any
project in the interior design domain can be thought of as canned, and
you can explain the difference openly to your client. Asking the right

(02)5-8 IDG Pricing, Estimating 3/3/05 3:07 PM Page 77

questions up front will gain you more respect, long-term confidence,
and integrity.
Knowing the different possibilities for square-footage pricing, even
in approximate ranges, will be an asset in initial client meetings, where
you might be asked to discuss rates on the spot. Figure on at least three
different quality levels, do the math, and keep these numbers under your
friendly cap.The last thing you want is to be asked a question that leaves
you looking like a deer caught in headlights.

Retainers

P RICING O PTIONS

Retainer pricing means that a client pays you a straight monthly fee
for services you provide. In actuality, the client is retaining your services
for a consistent fee based on your annual volume of work production
for them.
Retainers were primarily devised for full-service design firms by
clients, such as real estate developers who would buy design, finishes,
and furnishings on an ongoing basis using an annual budget. The
retainer fee would be used essentially like a revolving credit card for the
firm to make purchase orders and expedite the project. On a monthly,
quarterly, or annual basis, the entire account required an intense review
to determine whether the firm was overpaid or underpaid, what exact
services were performed at what rate, what projects the client had added
unexpectedly, and so on.
Many large firms and even some large design firms still use this
billing procedure for large, ongoing accounts, but its feasibility and popularity is quickly waning.The biggest problem is that many times the firm
ends up owing the client money. Most firms simply don’t have the cash
flow to pay back money that they’ve already used for something else.
Every client I have spoken to about retainers over the last ten years has
been burned by them.
Another problem with retainers is the legal descriptions, contracts,
and attorney fees that ensue with such an entanglement before you can
even get started working with the client. Not to mention the paperwork and accounting nightmares that suddenly face your office manager (or you). If a client suggests a retainer program to you, however,
don’t cower in abject fear. That suggestion means there’s lots of work
coming your way.
A great advantage of retainers is certainly the consistent cash flow
that will prevail, as well as a guaranteed level of work. Retainers are a

■

The Interior Designer’s Guide to P RICING, E STIMATING, and B UDGETING

■

(02)5-8 IDG Pricing, Estimating 3/3/05 3:07 PM Page 78

great way to grow your firm because you can assign a staff member to
“manage” the retainer account while hiring new staff members to either
dedicate to that account or work on new projects. Make certain to have a
contract stating that the payments are not refundable and that the account
will be reviewed quarterly by both you and your client (to make sure that
you don’t “owe” your client too much work, or to bill additional fees to
your client that were not covered in your original retainer agreement).
The biggest negative thing about retainers is that they are contractually binding, usually for at least a year, if not longer.This can be a good
thing for you if all is peaceful and smooth. On the other hand, it can be
a living nightmare if, for example, all of a sudden you lose rapport with
your client or the person with whom you work directly gets replaced
by someone with whom you can’t work too well. Make succession plans
for your business for the impending loss of cash flow if either of these
things happens, forcing you not to renew the contract when it expires.

Quick Billing
A creative alternative exists to the monetary tracking hassles that retainers
require.Why not suggest a simple pay-as-you-go concept to your client
instead? Billing can be done on a weekly, biweekly, or monthly basis
(depending on volume) for the work done within that period; the client
could agree to pay you within a week of receiving your invoice.
You might even give a 2-percent discount as an incentive if payment
is received within ten days, five days, or whatever you decide is fair.
Involving your client in this process shows your business acumen and
also shows that you are serious about proficient service.
If you and your client agree to a quick-pay or other creative billing
program versus a retainer, also ask for a ninety-day-out agreement.This
could be a simple letter of agreement outlining your request for ninety
days’ advance notice should your client decide to terminate your
ongoing services. Outline these ongoing services as explicitly as possible
so that the volume of work is apparent.Your signature and your client’s
signature on your letterhead outlining your agreement quite simply suffices for a legally binding document. The ninety-day agreement will
give you time to plan when a client does terminate your services and
will also remind your client of his or her commitment to you.

Per-Project Pricing
Countless times I’ve been asked questions by clients like, “How much
would you charge me for a sixteen-color, five-by-eight-foot carpet?”

(02)5-8 IDG Pricing, Estimating 3/3/05 3:07 PM Page 79

Or, “How much would you charge to do two rooms of flooring
design?” These types of questions are frequently asked by new clients
trying to get a feel for your rates.
As previously discussed regarding square-footage rates, you should
have some idea of how to answer these questions.You don’t want to be
intimidated into quoting a lower price because you’re being asked to
think on your toes. If you’re not sure what you would like your answer
to be, simply respond that you need more specifics, that each job is certainly different, and that you will provide a rate that afternoon or
tomorrow or whatever, to make it clear that you are not simply skirting
the pricing issue. Self-confidence is key here in your communicative
rapport. People can pick up on your weaknesses quickly and use them
to their advantage if you’re not prepared with an answer.
Again, using a range of fees is always safe in these circumstances—
your answer can be, “anywhere from $10,000 to $100,000”—and in
many instances will prove to the client that you simply need more information to be more accurate. Being able to quote a range of fees is the
perfect segue to your next question, which is, “Do you have a specific
design project coming up that I could quote on?”
After you have completed several similar projects, you will have a
good idea of what these types of projects entail cost-wise. This type of
pricing simply will not work on full-service pricing but it is fairly
simple on textile design projects and condo/development projects if
they are of similar scope to projects you have done in the past or if they
are “cookie-cutter” projects with a simple change of color palette,
lighting, or hardware style.

Bartering for Profit

P RICING O PTIONS
■

Bartering is indeed a way to make a nice profit of a different sort. Surely,
you remember your Weekly Reader as a kid—it often described exciting
trade journeys from the far corners of the world. Bartering is just the
slang word used for trade, usually referring to trade on a somewhat less
grand scale—that is, between individuals or small groups.
I have designed many fun and creatively rewarding projects for
clients who didn’t have a lot of money but had something to offer in
return. A very popular local restaurant in my old hometown is a great
example of this. The Winds Cafe & Bakery is owned by a couple of
friends who work hard and get rave reviews from critics all around the
state of Ohio. I happen to enjoy eating their unique Mediterranean-style
and nouvelle cuisine dishes. Back in my graphic design days, the Winds

The Interior Designer’s Guide to P RICING, E STIMATING, and B UDGETING

■

(02)5-8 IDG Pricing, Estimating 3/3/05 3:07 PM Page 80

needed a logo—and sub-logos for their carryout bakery, coffee beans,
and wines—but they didn’t want to spend thousands of dollars for design
and production.We agreed that they would pay for their fixed costs—the
money required to print new menus, letterheads, business cards,
envelopes, matches, and T-shirts, for example. Fees for design services and
production would be bartered. So, everybody was happy—I ate great
meals once a week and entertained friends and clients at no actual dollar
cost, and the Winds got nicely designed promotional items and signage,
many of which have won design awards and continue to be used today.
Another example of a successful bartering arrangement concerns a
very talented furniture builder whose display window I marveled at on
countless occasions. Through an unusual chain of events, I was introduced to this man, who immediately discussed his need for some design
services. Business was brisk for Glen, but he wanted to be doing more
highly designed, custom pieces. The tradeoff here was a design for his
showroom in exchange for an incredible conference table that playfully
emulates a grand piano. Although we really needed a meeting table for
our offices, we would never have been able to actually spend the money
on an item as lavish as a faux grand piano. Glen and I decided that he
would make the table during his down periods, and I would design his
space in the same manner.
If you have a staff and are actually paying a staff member salary to
work on barter accounts, you have to be very careful that you are busy
enough with actual paying work to generate cash flow to compensate
that particular staff member’s time. Also, be very careful not to have too
many barter accounts in house at any time.
The best barter situations are those that 1) specifically fit your needs
when an exchange is established; 2) affirm your need for a loose
schedule so that you can fit them into down times; and last but not least,
3) retain a very high level of respect from your barter client for the type
of designs you produce and finishes that are installed.The last thing you
want is to trade any dollars’ worth of your time with someone who will
make content and finish alterations that could leave you biting the bullet
and unhappy with your agreement.
Flexibility in pricing options shows your clients that you care not
only about the creative process but about their bottom line and budget
constraints as well, and the beauty of offering these options can mean
enhanced profitability for you as well.

(02)5-8 IDG Pricing, Estimating 3/3/05 3:07 PM Page 81

The Details on Estimates

his chapter proves to you that estimates will be the benchmark for the majority of projects you produce.Whether you
are operating as a freelancer, a small studio, or a large design firm,
an estimate shows your client that you are indeed a professional,
that you have a good understanding of the client’s expectations
regarding creative needs and budget constraints, and that you
know how to get the job done proficiently. An estimate is your
primary starting point for good project management and for
healthy client relationships. Never underestimate its importance.

What Is an Estimate?

P RICING O PTIONS
■

A good estimate acts as a blueprint for a successful project and a
satisfied client.This is truly the stage of a project that determines
the quality of the end result. Goals for the finished project
should be established and shared with your client as you review
your estimate together.Your client will appreciate your thoroughness and understanding of the project when you provide a cohesive, concise estimate.You will benefit by gaining a client who
shares your vision of the job.
An estimate is an evaluation or appraisal of a specific project
in terms of creative and technical specifications and the fees
required to implement these specifications. The estimate ultimately places an actual value on a project—not only from a cost
standpoint, but from a creative application vantage as well.
Basically, there are two types of estimates: detailed, itemized estimates and simple, lump-sum estimates.
Your estimate will often become your contract for a specific
project, so it’s important to do your homework until you’re
comfortable with the information you’re providing your client.
This will also give your client the confidence to proceed with
your services. Last, but not least, it will open the door to your

The Interior Designer’s Guide to P RICING, E STIMATING, and B UDGETING

■

(02)5-8 IDG Pricing, Estimating 3/3/05 3:07 PM Page 82

own creativity when you can (finally!) get started on the design,
knowing in advance the parameters you will be working within.
On many occasions, clients will inquire about a project and request
an estimate, only for you to find out later that the piece is stuck in a
large black hole called “budget allocation.” In this case, a client may be
putting together a budget for an entire project that exists only conceptually in his company—and he is merely looking for an approximation
of money to allocate for that specific purpose.There will also be times
when clients think they need a project done right away, only to realize
when they get estimates that they don’t have enough money allocated
for it.
Creating preliminary estimates will appease both you and your client
in these cases. A full-blown estimate takes a long time to prepare, and
most clients who are familiar with buying interior design services will
understand and appreciate that fact. A preliminary estimate should be
defined as such in your estimate’s headline.You should then prepare it as
you would a range or “not-to-exceed” estimate, which are both
reviewed later in this chapter.This procedure will save you time, while
giving your client the information needed for allocation of funds.
If your client has never used professional interior design services, it
will be good usage of your time to qualify the client by asking if he
is prepared to pay your hourly rate of, say, $100 per hour in exchange
for a perfectly delightful family room, kitchen, entire home, etc.
Taking some time up front to explain your fees can save you a lot of
time and heartache presenting an estimate that the client is not
expecting. Especially if a residential client is inexperienced with
design services, it will be up to you to explain your process and what
he will receive versus doing the project himself or (horrors!) with
another designer.You will need to make sure that neither of you gets
embarrassed or, worse yet, angry with the other because of this necessary, up-front communication.
Patience is imperative when you prepare estimates and, more importantly, when you submit those estimates for approval. As you process
more and more requests for estimates, you will be better able to assess
which projects are 1) actually hot prospects waiting to be produced; 2)
“maybe” projects, depending on how much they are going to cost; or 3)
won’t be produced for months. One of the first questions you should
ask while reviewing a project for estimating purposes is, “What is your
time frame for having this project completed?” Once you have the
answer to this inquiry, you can discuss with your client which type of
estimate will best suit his immediate needs.

(02)5-8 IDG Pricing, Estimating 3/3/05 3:07 PM Page 83

Let me warn you about assuming that your clients—new or
existing—know how to establish realistic budgets. A few months ago, a
good friend asked me to give him an estimate on a very exciting
project. Since we were friends and knew a lot about each other’s
processes, we skipped a lot of preliminary fact-finding and dove right
into his needs. This end result was to be the equivalent of the best
project we had ever produced. It rang with possibilities, sang with promises, and soared beyond eagles.You get the picture.
Well, about six weeks after we submitted our estimate, my dear
friend freaked out because he had set aside about $200,000 to do a
project that we estimated costing $850,000. He embarrassingly had to
go back to his superiors to get more money approved and explain to
them why he didn’t know it would cost so much to complete in the first
place. This guy is a very talented corporate real estate developer, but
really does not have a clue about how to buy design services or how
much they should cost. He did know that he needed a highly designed,
uniquely furnished 4,200-square-foot luxury condo for a huge company and a piece of real estate that will sell for millions of dollars. He
also knew the target audience and all the relative information that I
needed to know to price the project.
Had I been more inquisitive and perceptive, I could have helped him
by providing him with my doomsday information right from the start.
Had he been more inquisitive, he would have had my firm provide him
with a preliminary estimate before he presented his original budget to
his superiors for review.The moral of this story is, shame on both of us.
Take the opportunity to be proactive with your clients about budgeting
and providing them with realistic numbers for upcoming projects.
Providing this service enhances your clients’ perception of your business
knowledge and puts you first in their minds when the time comes to
assign the project. It also gives you a first foot in the door to follow
through on projects you know are coming up.

■

I recommend providing your client with detailed, itemized estimates,
particularly for special, one-of-a-kind projects, even after you have a
long-term relationship established. The advantages of providing a
more detailed estimate include protecting yourself against possible
false expectations, showing a real “bottom line” or total cost, and
having a “legal” document should you face the unfortunate circumstance of needing one. A signed estimate actually doubles as a legal
contract and requires your client to pay you for services and products

T HE D ETAILS on E STIMATES

Preparing an Estimate

The Interior Designer’s Guide to P RICING, E STIMATING, and B UDGETING

■

(02)5-8 IDG Pricing, Estimating 3/3/05 3:07 PM Page 84

outlined within. After working with a client on an ongoing basis, you
will discover how to tailor your estimating process to achieve maximum efficiency.

Here are six main questions to ask yourself every time you prepare
an estimate:
1.
2.

3.
4.
5.
6.

Who is the estimate being prepared for?
What is the name of the estimate? Give it a header like “Estimate
for 2005 Harris & Greenburg Law Offices: A New Environment” or
“Estimate for Coldwell Banker Corporate Headquarters, New York:
The Future Is Now.” A creative name will generate excitement for
the project for you and your client and perhaps extend itself into
the finished theme.
How is the overview of the project to be defined?
What are the technical specs for the project?
Who will do what?
What are the fees?

You will need to know and use terms like “in-house services,”“outside costs,” and “outside suppliers.” In-house simply means those services your firm generates completely while using equipment, staff, and
knowledge that you physically have in your studio or office. Outside
costs are generated by outside suppliers, such as picture framers, painters,
and floor installers—any service you require to complete a project that
you don’t originate from under your own roof.
Use the list of questions and the following, more detailed checklist
to help you devise an appropriate format for your estimates. Also, consider using an estimating worksheet so that you don’t forget anything.
This is a form designed for internal use only (clients never need to see
this form), and is common as a guide in the estimating process. This
form can include some of the questions I’ve outlined here as well as
questions that you find to be appropriate to specific projects. The
important thing is to find a format that speaks to your own sense of
organization, and to cover all the relevant details. I’ll review the
between-the-lines information you’ll need to know about preparing
estimates throughout the rest of this chapter.

(02)5-8 IDG Pricing, Estimating 3/3/05 3:07 PM Page 85

Here is a detailed checklist of items to include in your estimates:
A concise description of the project
Overview of project phases
Assignment of responsibilities (i.e., yours versus your client’s versus

the subcontractor’s)
A list of what you will provide and subsequent fees. I call this

“creative development,” and list research, design, resourcing,
presentation, palette, and finishing materials
Supplies and materials required and their costs
Photography required and subsequent fees, including your art
direction
Any special circumstances such as ADA requirements, design
adaptation for seniors or persons with special needs, etc.
Walls/ceiling treatment
Floor treatment(s)
Wall treatment
Millwork required
Window treatment(s)
Furnishings
Accessories
Travel expenses
Delivery or freight expenses
Installation
Payment terms
Your signature and a line for your client’s signature

T HE D ETAILS on E STIMATES

You may use “TBD” (to be determined) if the exact specs have not
been decided yet. Make sure that when you have a conclusion on any
loose ends, you do a revised and detailed estimate to obtain sign-off on
any TBD items.
Preparing an accurate, thorough estimate depends on your ability to
obtain the essential information required. Never be intimidated by your
client or feel like you are asking too many questions. When a client
informs you of a project, set up a meeting so you can go over the project
elements face to face. As mentioned earlier, you may find simpler ways
of accomplishing the estimating task as rapport is established with a
client; but initially, face-to-face contact is important in gaining trust and
perceiving expectations.

■

The Interior Designer’s Guide to P RICING, E STIMATING, and B UDGETING

■

(02)5-8 IDG Pricing, Estimating 3/3/05 3:07 PM Page 86

This important initial discussion with the client will set the precedent for all future client rapport. Be ultra-organized for this meeting,
and be on time! Take a calendar, and after you have the necessary information, plan a schedule with the client that you will confirm in writing
after the estimate is approved. Discuss the project’s process with your
client: what happens first, next, and so on, step by step, to make sure the
client understands the significant role he plays.
This first meeting is the “master” meeting, where you must gain your
client’s confidence and have him relinquish control of the project to you
willingly. You will have great success if you keep your client involved
throughout this process; everyone likes to feel needed and important. I
have found clients to be far less meddlesome in the design and implementation phases if I involve them heavily in the planning phase and
maintain our agreed-upon schedule.
Use this meeting to review exactly what services you will provide
and specifically what the client will be providing for you to accomplish
your great feat. If the client is providing certain elements, like furnishings or lighting, ask to see samples.Will they provide items compatible
with the design you are envisioning? Are you expected to create a
design using their provided items as a platform? Are important family
heirlooms to be included and featured in certain ways? Assessing the
quality of materials and finishes required of your completed project is of
utmost significance now; if you’re talking Ferrari and your client is
talking Hyundai, you’re both in trouble! Educating your client may be
very necessary in this meeting. (See chapter 11 for more on educating
your client.)
Don’t be afraid to ask for what you want. If your client is providing
some of the project elements and you are not pleased with their quality,
ask if you can include within your estimate the fees required for their
possible updating. All a client can do is say no and offer an explanation
of why not. I’ve found that, for the most part, clients are very open to
constructive comments and generally receptive to receiving an education of sorts, after you have gained sufficient confidence to present these
matters objectively and are sure that you won’t be putting anyone on
the defensive.There’s always the case where a client’s daughter designed
the urn that goes in the foyer or the eldest son who made the nightstand lamp in a workshop.And there is a time and a place for everything!
Taking time to understand your new assignment and client is of
maximum importance. Be very aware of the underlying factors that
influence successful projects. You may need to take some time before
your initial client meeting to read up about the client, especially if it is

(02)5-8 IDG Pricing, Estimating 3/3/05 3:07 PM Page 87

a new one. If the client is a corporation, get your hands on its annual
report or any self-promotional material it may have, and be knowledgeable about who you’re dealing with. If your client is an individual, try
looking him or her up on an Internet search engine. Diving design-first
into projects without knowing more about your clients—their history
and expectations—is a serious waste of time if you want repeat clientele.
If the client is a start-up business, or he or she doesn’t have promotional materials to share with you, ask about any related information you
could read, like industry trade magazines or competitors’ brochures.This
shows that your attentiveness and detail-oriented manner are more than
skin deep, and that you are truly committed to being prepared. Clients
always appreciate this level of preparation and will ultimately reward it
with coveted projects.
In addition to reading up on the client, you may need to become
knowledgeable about the client’s target audience, who will be visiting the
space(s), as well as how and when it will be used. Usually, this research
should be done before your estimate is approved; don’t forget to allow sufficient fee structure within your creative development fees to do the proper
investigation and get paid for it. Clients will appreciate your acknowledgment of the research task as an important contribution. If a significant
amount of time is required to do it properly, add it as a separate line item
on your estimate. Cutting corners on research time is certain to simultaneously cut the level of respect you will get from your clients.

Range and “Not-to-Exceed” Estimates

T HE D ETAILS on E STIMATES
■

Sometimes a client simply won’t take the time to meet with you long
enough, thus resulting in you not having enough information to provide a thorough estimate. In this case, you might provide an estimate
range, which would include an overview of how you perceive the
finished project, brief specifications, and then a realistic price range (like
$100,000 to $125,000).You also want to spell out terms of payment and
get an authorized signature on the range, just as you would for any other
estimate. Estimates provided in ranges tend to get the client’s attention,
and in the case that such an estimate is approved (and they sometimes
are), it protects you by being vague in itemizations but inclusive of any
possible, necessary fees.
The other option for providing an estimate when you don’t have
enough information is to develop a “not-to-exceed” estimate. In this
case, you again provide a brief project description and specifications
while virtually guaranteeing to do the project for a price not to exceed
the amount you are stipulating. Some clients will be amenable to this

The Interior Designer’s Guide to P RICING, E STIMATING, and B UDGETING

■

(02)5-8 IDG Pricing, Estimating 3/3/05 3:07 PM Page 88

arrangement; others will be shocked to their senses and agree to give
you more information and get more involved.
Providing range and not-to-exceed estimates saves you time because
you don’t have to sweat over the details.You also save time by more-orless assuming the specifications. It is imperative, however, that you pad
your outside costs substantially to cover the many yet-unturned stones.
An omnipresent number of variables hover above your estimate-inthe-making. Think of your estimate as the framework for all things to
come:When a builder builds a home, he can’t set up the framing without
first looking at a plan, and only after the framework is built can the
plumbing, electricity, windows, walls, flooring, and trim be added. Only
then, after those tasks are finally accomplished, do you get to move your
furniture in! Learn to moderate by carefully taking one step at a time.

The Estimating Process
When your initial discussion with your client regarding the scope of the
project is behind you, the road is paved for you to begin your estimating
process. Find a comfortable place, close your eyes, and take yourself on
an imaginary journey through the creation of the entire project from
start to finish. Now, either with a notepad or a mini-recorder, document this scenario in detail. By doing this task you will achieve two
things: The first accomplishment will be to perceive the less-obvious
tasks and possible variables you will encounter throughout the project’s
evolution. The second will be to have an image in your mind of how
the project will flow. This exercise is the first step toward organized,
creative project management.
Planning for things like travel expenses, long-distance telephone
charges, and freight charges will provide you and your client with the
most comprehensive estimate. No client likes to be surprised with such
charges at the end of a project, long after the charges have been
incurred. Remember: It’s very important to involve your clients in the
process, so they know what it will take for you to get the job done right.
As mentioned earlier, your own mistakes and technical blunders (such
as fatal errors on your computer like entering the wrong measurements)
are not billable; however, you may want to plan now for the extra time
you will no doubt need to cover or fix some of your faux pas. Knowing
just how much to pad for these variables is a tough call, and it’s best to
remain conservative, especially if your rates are under scrutiny.
Client revisions and the mistakes they may make are billable and
should be called out as such within your estimate. Since you can’t really
plan for these particular variables and client whims in your original

(02)5-8 IDG Pricing, Estimating 3/3/05 3:07 PM Page 89

T HE D ETAILS on E STIMATES
■

estimate, it is important that you allow for their occurrence as part of
your billable time. Stating something like “Client revisions to be billed
at $75 per hour” at the end of your estimate is totally acceptable and
very common. You can count on many clients getting nervous about
this note; however, it does encourage the client to give you the right
information and authorization the first time around. Also, after your
explanation that a typical design change or two will only take a half
hour (assuming hammers have not been lifted yet), a client is reassured.
And in the case where a client wants to make substantial design revisions after the project is well underway, you are indeed covered.
Add the time of preparing the estimate itself into your project fees.
Even a simple project requires a lot of phone calls to outside suppliers,
and every hour of billable time you incur should be included in your
costs.You will probably want to include the estimate preparation time
in your creative development fees. This will avoid any attention being
brought to the matter, since it will be a small amount of time compared
to the total hours spent on creative development.
Another often-forgotten variable is adding an allowance for rush
charges you may incur from outside suppliers, especially if you are busy
with other projects when you take on a new one. Many suppliers will
charge incredible handling fees for expediting samples, furnishings, or
other items through their warehouse and outside of their normal turnaround time. Rush charges can very quickly skim significant percentages from your profit margin.
While variables can truly cost you money, proper planning and comprehensive estimating are the real keys to profitability. Believe me, after
only one project that ends up costing you money to produce, you’ll learn
the lesson that haste truly makes waste. Unfortunately, it eventually happens to all of us. But if you’re really smart, it will only happen once.
It is not uncommon to charge your client overtime fees if the
schedule is extremely tight—to the point where lots of overtime will be
required. If, for example, your client wants a new office space designed
before a particular corporate event, within anything less than a typical
three- or four-month period, you and your support vendors will most
certainly spend many late nights accomplishing this task.As you become
more familiar with how much time certain tasks require, you will also
become more confident establishing ground rules for how much time
you need to produce the job properly.A client will assume that he or she
is totally in line if you don’t bring the issue to the forefront.Also, you will
be setting a dangerous example for how much time will be allowed for
you to do future projects if you don’t charge properly for your overtime.

The Interior Designer’s Guide to P RICING, E STIMATING, and B UDGETING

■

(02)5-8 IDG Pricing, Estimating 3/3/05 3:07 PM Page 90

During busy periods, even accepting a job with a normal turnaround schedule can suddenly become a crazy overtime venture—but
one that your client cannot be responsible for. It’s a great idea to plan
for these occasions: meet capable freelancers and set up a strong support
network for yourself in anticipation of this eventual occurrence.
Burnout for you and your staff members is truly devastating and can be
avoided with proper planning.
Accepting a project with a tight schedule—whether your client or
your own busy schedule created it—is a commitment of many sorts. At
all costs, don’t get into the habit of missing deadlines. Our industry is
notorious for being full of pressure to meet deadlines. If you think about
it, there is a huge domino effect that you immediately become involved
in upon a project’s initiation. You are the middleman between your
client and the other vendors required to complete the project—whether
you hire them or not. Passing the buck to outside suppliers when you
start to run behind on your schedule is strictly taboo. When missing a
deadline really is another vendor’s fault, you should insist that he write
a letter to your client admitting that fact.
I think the most important element where meeting deadlines is concerned is to keep your client informed of extenuating circumstances.
For example, if a project requires a lot of outdoor construction, and this
in turn depends on good weather, your schedule could quickly go down
the proverbial drain in a matter of hours. Don’t become known to your
clients or vendors for always being behind schedule. Sure, you’re going
to miss some deadlines eventually. But it is very important that you
know how to diplomatically repair unfavorable results that will occur in
these situations. If you’re an infrequent offender on the running-out-oftime scene, you’ll probably be able to negotiate your way out of it.
Unfortunately, clients are sometimes lost because of it.
At the end of my own firm’s estimates, we have a disclaimer that
simply states: Final costs may fluctuate 15 to 20 percent due to actual
expenses and time logged.Very seldom have clients asked me about this.
The only exception, perhaps, is when I have provided not-to-exceed
estimates. In this case, the client usually expects and deserves not to be
billed for overages, assuming that they are already built in.
We’ve already discussed the fact that you must build in a little extra
time for unforeseeable situations. Once again, as you gain experience
producing similar projects or projects for specific clients, a pattern of
time requirements will most certainly emerge. Certain computer programs also allow you the luxury of comparing projects and the actual
time logged on them at the touch of a button. As you develop a track

(02)5-8 IDG Pricing, Estimating 3/3/05 3:07 PM Page 91

record for yourself, the guessing game will turn into an actual target that
is more consistently achievable.

Additional Variables
Some possible variables often overlooked in the estimating process
include:
■

■

■
■
■

Time needed for research, outside vendor coordination, and those
moments when you’re in a creative slump
Postage, freight, and delivery costs—not just for the final
product, but for all the things that transpire along the way to a
project’s completion
Proofreading time for purchase-order product numbers, delivery
addresses, etc.
Client meeting time—especially if you will be working with
a committee
Long-distance and/or mobile telephone charges
Travel expenses—not only for you, but perhaps for your assistant(s)
Markups—often these fees added onto outside vendor charges
become your lifesaver when you’ve miscalculated time requirements
or other charges

Creating good estimates is a challenging task because it establishes the
entire foundation of a project. Many times, after starting a project, you will
get an idea that might enhance the project. Know that pursuing this idea
will cost you money, since it does not appear on your original estimate. If
you are notorious for changing your mind and coming up with ideas after
the estimate has been approved, ask for “design revision allowances” on
your estimate and explain your creative process to your client.

T HE D ETAILS on E STIMATES
■

(02)5-8 IDG Pricing, Estimating 3/3/05 3:07 PM Page 92

(03)9-13 IDG PricingEstimating 3/3/05 3:09 PM Page 93

Proposals

have fondly nicknamed the official Request for Proposal
(RFP) a “cattle call.” This must go back to my childhood,
watching a farmer friend of my dad’s calling in his dairy cattle.
The analogy seems quite accurate when you study the specifics.

RFPs or RIPs?
An RFP is certain to hit your mailbox one of these days. The
RFP is most commonly a multipage document that an organization will send out detailing its need for designed and printed
material regarding a specific subject. Certain organizations even
have forms you can fill out to get on their RFP list. Usually, you
will be informed of the technical specifications in the initial
document—the scope of the project, square footage, who supplies what, finished quality, and so on. Sometimes, the RFP will
include a budget or a “final price not to exceed” rate, but most
often the RFP will be asking you for a budget. Many times, the
RFP will require your presence at a particular meeting, where
you will take notes on the extensive requirements and see your
colleagues who are “mooing” for the same project. But wait, it
gets even more desirable. . . .
RFPs are undeniably a drag. The most hateful thing about
them is that the proposed project is usually really cool and
something you want for your portfolio.You never know when
and where to read between the lines, though: Are they looking
for the lowest bid? Are they looking just for a budget on a
project that they will plug into their next fiscal year? Some
RFPs even have the audacity to ask you to include a creative
concept, finishing prototypes, or idea board with your estimate—all on spec, of course. Just how much time should you
put into this nonsense? These questions can only be answered
on an individual basis.

The Interior Designer’s Guide to P RICING, E STIMATING, and B UDGETING

■

(03)9-13 IDG PricingEstimating 3/3/05 3:09 PM Page 94

A Case Study
Quite coincidentally, I am right this minute sitting on the edge of my
seat waiting for an answer from a small city nearby that recently sent out
an RFP. It’s a beautiful project that I would love to get my hands on.
The dreaded RFP came as they always do—regular mail, with details,
details, and more details. There was a request for creative “sketches,” a
request for a budget, a ten-day deadline for submission of the proposal
package, and a contact name.
What, in this day and age, are “creative sketches,” and how does
one go about acquiring a high-end job—or even being properly
considered—by providing “sketches”? I phoned the contact person
to first verify that indeed this job did not have a predetermined
design-firm destination (this happens often; some RFPs, especially
those issued by governmental institutions, must be issued for formality purposes, to follow the “rules” of certain organizations). Next,
I confirmed that they were not looking for the lowest bid. Then, I
got as much information as I could about the qualities that they were
looking for, not only in the piece itself but also in the services to
be provided.
As soon as I had enough information, my senior designer and I sat
down to work up our presentation. Even though his billable time is
higher than the other designers on our team, I knew that his capabilities and efficiency would be more cost-effective for me in the long run.
The outcome was a great presentation, along with voluminous hopes
that we will be granted this coveted project.
In this case, the client was forthcoming with information, familiar
with my firm, and strongly encouraged our participation. I shared with
the client that it is not our general practice to do work on spec but that
we were very interested in the project and would proceed on his recommendation. The deciding factors for me were his openness and the
generous amount of time he spent on the telephone reviewing the
project with me.
Since the RFP was issued by a governmental organization, I knew
from experience they would not have any presentation money. I have
gotten into the habit of asking quite vocally at the aforementioned
information sessions if some limited funds have been set aside for presentations, simply to cover costs. This always generates clapping from
the audience and probably a red circle with a slash through it in the
presenter’s notebook with regard to my firm’s selection. At that point
I don’t really care. It is indeed our duty to educate organizations that

(03)9-13 IDG PricingEstimating 3/3/05 3:09 PM Page 95

consistently ask for spec work to, at the very least, offer minimum
budgets for presentations. I think word is getting around; most
recently, I’ve noticed that fair budgets for presentations are typically
assigned to the final three firms making the cut for a certain project.
Then the client can objectively make comparisons on different firms’
creative approaches.
Your decision on whether or not to participate in a particular RFP
will depend on the circumstances: how busy you are when you receive
the RFP, how much you’ve learned from Intuition 101, and what the
prospective project means to your firm, not just in terms of money but
in increased recognition, prestige, and other factors.

Use the following checklist to help you decide when to answer the
cattle call:
Is there a contact name or a phone number to call for further

information?
Are you familiar with the organization?
Do they not have a firm or agency they seem to consistently choose?
Is this not a lowest-bid situation?
Does the scope of the project lie within your realm of expertise?

Make sure you answer all five items affirmatively before going for it;
otherwise, you’re certain to turn your next RFP reply into a big rip.

Proposals Versus Estimates

P ROPOSALS
■

Don’t confuse proposals with estimates. A proposal is always necessary
for larger projects and is often presented before the estimate to confirm
that you and your client are on the same wavelength regarding pertinent matters specific to the project. In some cases, the proposal is
included as a prelude to the estimate, or the proposal and estimate may
be presented together.
Basically, the proposal outlines the goals of a project, states the
objective, target audience, assignment of responsibilities, and so on.
Ideally, a proposal will include all aspects of the project and may even
include “sell” information about you and your staff. For example, you

The Interior Designer’s Guide to P RICING, E STIMATING, and B UDGETING

■

(03)9-13 IDG PricingEstimating 3/3/05 3:09 PM Page 96

may want to give credentials and other qualifications of your team,
such as a brief history, client list, and a list of industry acknowledgements received.
The proposal is a document in which you can outline your entire
approach to the project, so the client is very clear about everything you
will be doing. This is the place to put your client’s objectives (as you
have interpreted them) into writing. It’s also the place to address your
methodology or strategies, including any phases such as research, creative development, refinement of craftsmanship, and project implementation.Take this opportunity to outline client responsibilities during your
work together.What will the client provide, if anything? What deadlines
is the client responsible for, so the project can be kept on schedule?
How will revisions and additions be charged? What terms will apply if
the project is terminated after work has begun? All of these topics can
be dealt with in the proposal.
Often, the estimate is included as part of the proposal.This is logical:
Since the proposal is supplying information about each phase—and
even each step—in the project, why not also provide an estimated dollar
cost for each of these steps as they are outlined? This way, the client has
all applicable information at once.
An important note: When you receive a coveted Request for
Proposal, you’ll want to read it carefully and respond in the exact format
that specific client is requesting. Most of the time, an RFP is requesting

Use the following as a checklist of possible items to include in
a proposal:
A clearly defined project objective
Goals that the end product might achieve
Strategies as to how those goals may be realized
Target audience review (for commercial projects only)
Any market research findings
A list of any research that needs to be done
Assignment of responsibilities—what you will provide and what the

client will provide
An overview of the team players, your company history, your client

list, or any other sell information you can provide that will reinforce
the client’s confidence in choosing you

(03)9-13 IDG PricingEstimating 3/3/05 3:09 PM Page 97

your proposal and estimate, but many times, it is requesting a proposal
only. As mentioned earlier, your proposal may include a creative prototype or sketches as well.

Going for the Ultimate

P ROPOSALS
■

Nowadays, it’s pretty simple to do an awesome proposal. We have a
format we’ve recently created that is easy to produce and revise for different clients. We have historically had the good fortune of being
awarded several projects based strictly on our proposals—without providing estimates. Honestly, I can hardly believe it myself, but it’s true. I
believe the reason this can happen is that, currently, new housing construction and development is at an all-time high in my region. Clients
seem so increasingly demanding with regard to turnaround times, deadlines, and unreasonable expectations that if they find someone willing,
they’ll hire them.While I know that both of these reasons can be true,
I’m mentally ready for an economic downturn at any given moment.
Read: Never take situations like these for granted!
But let’s spend some time thinking about this “ultimate” situation for
a few minutes.Take some time to brainstorm the possibilities with your
own staff. If you work alone, consider hiring a short-term intern from
your local design school, community college, or university. Excellent
students dying to sponge up your knowledge can work for you, often
for little or no pay. Many college requirements include a mandatory
internship that students must fulfill before graduation. Using a fresh eye
and a fresh ear can really bring life to your proposals—especially if
you’ve never done one. Great references exist for your brainstorm session. See how the award winners are doing it by buying some industry
books on proposals and marketing your firm.
If you do not have professional portfolio pictures, use a digital
camera to take photos of your portfolio projects. Have fun with setting
up the shots, and use props like fresh flowers and wonderful artwork to
display the projects favorably. Print the images onto high-quality paper,
and include a brief description of the project near the photo. Use these
pages at the end of your proposal, selecting previously completed projects that convey your expertise in the type of project you are proposing.
Remember that in our industry, quality always translates into price.The
more “buttoned-up” you look, the easier it will be for you to justify a
higher price for your work.
Choose an interesting paper and binding method for the outside
cover of the proposal. Options are all over the place. Even if you live in
a remote or rural area (I do, so I know!), paper distributors and printers

The Interior Designer’s Guide to P RICING, E STIMATING, and B UDGETING

■

(03)9-13 IDG PricingEstimating 3/3/05 3:09 PM Page 98

in your nearest big city will be glad to keep you advised of new papers
and binding methods available.This is their job, and how they sell their
products and services.Take the time to ask for your inclusion on mailing
lists and promos. Paper reps are happy to set up an appointment and
meet with you to show you the latest goodies on the market. Ask lots
of questions. Ask for samples, and you can make your proposal covers
with different paper samples until you find the paper that works for you.
Quick-print outlets like Kinko’s can also be a good source for creativity—just know that anybody can go to Kinko’s, and a bit of ingenuity
on your own part by sleuthing papers and finishes yourself might make
you stand apart from your competition.
Within the framework of your proposal, if you do not include an
estimate for pricing, be sure to include your entire process. Perhaps you
might share how you will price the project—by using an hourly rate per
task, per person, or whatever. This entire proposal-instead-of-estimate
ideology comes from the large, full-service architectural/design firms
we so often find ourselves competing with. Larger corporate clients are
especially accustomed to receiving a voluminous amount of paperwork
when they are in the process of deciding which firm to hire. Help them
to make their decision by showing that you are the be-all of your
clients’ dreams. It’s easy and fun, like writing a book about why you
want the project, how you’re going to go about doing it, who you’ll be
working with, and so on.
Reviewing your proposal in person with your clients is a smart way
to make sure they don’t receive your life’s work and store it away for
lavatory reading or the coffee table. I never read the copy within the text
aloud—but I do review the information therein by going through the
subheads and verbally telling the client what they contain. This is my
opportunity to show my firm’s competence to the client.The end of my
proposal presentation includes a more detailed explanation of our portfolio pages.
More often than not, the person you’re presenting to will need to go
to a superior or authority group of people and reiterate to them what
you’ve just reviewed.While frustrating for you, this is typical. Many corporate clients are paranoid about their co-workers’ involvement and
want to project a sense of being in control, therefore wishing to present
your information to their own peers. It is a great day when your client
will allow you to present directly to the decision-making core.
Credibility for both you and your client begins here.
Instead of pricing within your proposal, try explaining the different
phases within the specified project. If the client is new, tell him your

(03)9-13 IDG PricingEstimating 3/3/05 3:09 PM Page 99

biggest reward is a satisfied, repeat client, and include testimonials or references from satisfied clients in your proposal. If you are a one-person
studio, developing a strategy and a “look” for your proposals will elevate
you tremendously in your customers’ eyes. If writing and self-marketing
are not your strengths, hire a freelance public-relations person or a professional writer to help you establish a template for this new endeavor.
Use your newfound bartering skills to trade these talented individuals
for work you both need to have accomplished, yet don’t have the cash,
time, or patience to complete.

P ROPOSALS
■

(03)9-13 IDG PricingEstimating 3/3/05 3:09 PM Page 100

(03)9-13 IDG PricingEstimating 3/3/05 3:09 PM Page 101

Troubleshooting Estimates
and Proposals

ow that you’re an expert at pricing and estimating, it’s time
to get comfortable with how you manage projects and
budgets. The estimate that you provide to your client actually
doubles as a project budget; it includes your rates, calculations,
and determinations. Now you have to produce what you said you
could produce for the amount of money you said it would take!
Throughout this book, we have reviewed some subjects that
will affect project management.The most common trauma you
will experience throughout your course of owning and managing your own firm are unexpected changes—in other words,
charges that either you or your client will need to absorb.
These issues will arise time and time again throughout the estimating and project-management phases of your jobs, and you
will learn how to tailor my examples of solutions to your own
particular needs.

Organizing for Productivity and Creativity
The most proactive thing you can do to ward off the evil
changes-and-charges demon is to organize, organize, organize. If
organizing and managing project budgets sounds like a big
responsibility, it is. I can’t stress enough the importance of setting
up forms and a project management system that will help you to
realize true and glorious profitability.Your last key to the profitability cache is to learn how to manage project budgets effectively.This, in turn, will open new doors to your creativity.Trust
me, creativity comes more easily when projects and money are
flowing smoothly; creative block is directly connected to stress.
Good project management saves time and money by acting
as a template, embracing all disciplinary aspects of a project.
Discipline is a word that carries us all back to our childhood;
it means rules and regulations and acting in some type of

The Interior Designer’s Guide to P RICING, E STIMATING, and B UDGETING

■

102

(03)9-13 IDG PricingEstimating 3/3/05 3:09 PM Page 102

So where do you begin? Use the following checklist for creating discipline
in project management—starting at the very beginning of the project:
Get a signed, approved estimate; this estimate will double as your

project budget
Review a detailed schedule with your client, your staff, and

your vendors
Work out dates in the schedule as needed until everyone has

agreed that it is reasonable
Next, make sure your schedule includes the following dates:
All of the dates when your client will provide you with the informa-

tion you will need to complete the project

controlled manner. Horrors! In general, it’s not a very friendly word, but
I suggest you learn to love it if you want more time to focus on creativity, design, and what you do best. Committing to disciplines of different varieties (some of which are given in this chapter) will truly save
time, money, and your sanity!
After your estimate has been approved, you’re ready to embark on
the creative aspirations that brought you the project in the first place. In
your master meeting, when you originally gathered the information
needed to compile your estimate, you also discussed a typical schedule
for the project with your client. This was your first step in establishing
discipline with regard to the project’s efficient management.
If you did not involve the client in this scheduling development, do
so immediately. Put the schedule in writing and detail every event that
will happen as part of the project. Include dates when you will receive
pertinent information from your client as well as when your client will
review everything you present for approval—from initial concepts to
the approval of finishes, colors, and furnishings. Reviewing the schedule
together with your client before you get started will save substantial
time for both of you. Neither of you will waste time wondering what
the other is doing with his or her portion of the tasks involved; nor will
you waste time trying to track each other down or e-mail questions in
an attempt to get what you need and expect from each other.
Substantial amounts of money are often wasted on rush charges with
service bureaus or manufacturers and on same-day and overnight
delivery charges. Many of these dollars can go right in your pocket if

(03)9-13 IDG PricingEstimating 3/3/05 3:09 PM Page 103

The date when you show your client initial design concepts for his

or her approval
A date when your client will either give you or approve the finished

plans for the project
The date when you show your client the color palette, finishes, and

furnishings, either in a three-dimensional computer-generated
format or in a format you have previously agreed to
The date when the first subcontractor begins
The date when the last subcontractor finishes
Delivery dates for furnishings, accessories, and installations
The date of the open house party

you discipline yourself, your staff, and your client by organizing project
events carefully before you begin. People in our industry seem especially
“addicted” to overnight and one-hour delivery services. Upon scrutiny
of your outside expenses, I can promise you that about 50 percent of
them could be eliminated with better project management.

Get Ready . . . Go !
T ROUBLESHOOTING E STIMATES and P ROPOSALS
■

Once all parties involved in the project—clients, staff, and vendors—
agree to the important project dates listed above, you can proceed to
realistically schedule your own personal time that will be required to
complete the project. Information and purchase orders to service
bureaus and outside vendors can now be planned by date with possible
incentives built in to meet or exceed project schedules.
Reimbursing your staff for their mileage expenses (the current IRSapproved rate is 37 cents per mile) is a lot less expensive than using
regional delivery services, makes the clients feel like they are personally
being serviced by your staff (and they are!), and makes your staff feel
trusted and more appreciated by you and your clients. If you do not
have a staff, consider hiring a student intern from a local design program
to do your deliveries a few times a week. Students love the experience
of being around design professionals; you’ll be doing them a favor and
at the same time saving a lot of money otherwise allotted for delivery
services. Lucky you!
Never, ever begin a job without a schedule or deadlines.We get a lot
of projects from one of our favorite clients that have no tight turn-

103

The Interior Designer’s Guide to P RICING, E STIMATING, and B UDGETING

■

104

(03)9-13 IDG PricingEstimating 3/3/05 3:09 PM Page 104

around requirements. (That’s why they’re one of our favorites.) They’ll
say, “Well, we have a trade show about six months from now, and we’ll
need a new booth look by then.” Usually, it’s a project that could easily
be designed and produced within four to six weeks.These types of projects can (and will) go on and on—with everyone perfecting and redoing
little things here and there into oblivion—unless you have created a disciplined schedule. In the past, evaluating time and expenses incurred on
these pseudo-eternal projects always came as a surprise—they were our
least profitable (albeit least stressful) jobs.
The biggest roadblock to successful project management is you.
Well, maybe or maybe not. But let’s face it—stereotypical designers love
to rock the boat and procrastinate, waiting until absolutely the last
minute to get the adrenaline going to produce a dynamite concept.The
only problem with this recurring scenario is that when it’s all said and
done, you always look at the project and say something like, “If I’d just
had more time to do this,” or,“If I’d just had another day, I would have
tried a different color palette that might have looked better.”The truth
of the matter is that you often did indeed have that time (check your
schedule!); you just chose to do other things.
Nobody likes to hear the self-discipline rap. I myself really hate it
deep down and almost can’t believe I’m preaching it.The truth is that,
after all these years in the industry (twenty and counting), I really have
found a balance between procrastination—with its craziness—and the
real secret to creativity.You need to find a balance within every day—
or at least every week to start—between the time spent adhering to
your set project schedules and the time you allow yourself to run free.
If you don’t, you’ll find yourself on a roller coaster: The highs will be
incredibly creative, but the lows will wipe you out.You may find yourself getting sick too often with colds, flu, and so on, or you might even
experience the total blackness of burnout.
A huge part of project management is taking the schedule you’ve
created and following it, not only by doing the work yourself, but also
by delegating to others whenever you need to and firmly requesting
that staff and vendors alike adhere to the schedule. Even if you work by
yourself, student interns, service bureaus, and freelancers are eager to
help when you’re in over your head. If you have agreed to a schedule
that for the most part you have directed, you are the very last person
who should have trouble sticking to it. Get help when you need it.
Learn to do exactly what you do best all of the time, and then find
a team of support people—whether they are occasional freelancers or
regular staff—who specialize in tasks that you don’t do so well. For

(03)9-13 IDG PricingEstimating 3/3/05 3:09 PM Page 105

example, if you’re a great people person, you love client contact, and you
love coming up with ideas for projects, find a core of support people
who are great at putting your ideas on paper and creating presentations
and another person or two who are great at research and resourcing so
that you don’t have to be it all, let alone do it all, in your peak periods.
You will be infinitely more creative, make more money, and be a lot
more fulfilled once you look at project management in this way. Just
remember, do what you do best all the time, every day, and find other
people to do what they do best, every day, all the time. This is the key
to superior project management.
The type of project management system you need will depend primarily on the size and complexity of your business. If it’s just you, or
you and one or two other people, it’s easiest to just implement a simple
system; I recommend the job-jacket system outlined in chapter 6. For a
larger group of people, you’ll want to include everyone in devising and
implementing a system that works for all the individuals involved. (See
“Develop a System That Works for You,” page 64.)

The Perils of Perfectionism

T ROUBLESHOOTING E STIMATES and P ROPOSALS
■

As you gather information for your estimate, perhaps the most important task will be to assess the time that will be required to produce a
project. From that time assessment, you will either multiply your
required hours by your hourly rate or assign a value amount to the job,
as described earlier.The only thing that can really throw a big whammy
into your allotted time frame, or at least the only thing that you’ll be
able to anticipate up front, is a tendency toward perfectionism. If either
you or your client are prone to perfectionism, it can really spell trouble.
If you know yourself to be the potential culprit in this case, you’re
halfway to changing your bad habits. Start resolving the other half by
being extremely dedicated to tracking the time you spend on every task
concerning your next project.When the project is finished, add up your
total hours and divide that amount into the total dollar amount that the
invoice gives as your fee. The resulting figure is the overall hourly rate
you actually earned for that project. In many cases, you could earn more
flipping burgers at you-know-where!
Now, look objectively at each task within the project and determine
where you spent too much time. If this disappointing outcome happens
often, you are probably the victim of perfectionism. Do you have a tendency to perform tasks over and over, or to start a project over many
times before you move through it? You can only correct this problem by
strictly disciplining yourself to perform certain tasks only within

105

The Interior Designer’s Guide to P RICING, E STIMATING, and B UDGETING

■

106

(03)9-13 IDG PricingEstimating 3/3/05 3:09 PM Page 106

reasonable pre-allotted time frames. Share your dilemmas with colleagues,
and compare how much time it takes them to perform the same tasks.
If you have a client who is a perfectionist, you’ll recognize it during
your first meeting. Typical attributes of the perfectionist client are that
he will repeat the same things over in two or three different ways, and
ask you to read your notes back to him.Then, he will call you needlessly
every day to see how you are coming with his project. These disturbances take unnecessary time, which you will need to log on your time
sheets. Refer to the communication tips on page 82 to find ways to
avoid these situations before you start a project.Also, it might be effective
to gently remind your client that while you appreciate his need to have
everything done in a certain way, his conversations are causing the
project to go over budget. Remember, the name of the game is being
honest and up-front with yourself and your client at all times.
I realize this concept of “letting go” of a project is a most difficult
one for most of us. It’s hard to watch the kids throw toys all over the
house when you would like to have it ready for a location shoot at any
moment. The same analogy holds true for the way we create visual
design solutions.They can always be better with a color change here, a
modification there, some extra cornice molding in that conference
room.Vow to use what you learn after every piece is completed. Give
yourself permission to establish a deadline, then maybe just a few hours
of tweak time after the project is complete and you’ve had a chance to
catch a few z’s on the matter. If you know that you’re a tweaker, don’t
forget to add these “few hours” into your original estimate.
There is a way to possibly sneak in some extra billable hours if you
simply can’t let go. On more than one occasion, I’ve presented a design
to a client as is, and at the table told him about my new, improved idea.
If the client bites and likes your concept, it is the perfect time to ask if
you can get him a revised estimate to include your new ideas. This
leaves the door open for your client to have time to digest both the
new idea and the fact that the new work is going to cost a little more.
In this way, you don’t proceed with the new idea until your client
approves the extra costs; thus, you don’t lose any money. Make a steadfast rule with yourself that you will not proceed with the new work
unless funds are approved.

Bigger Problems than You Bargained for?
When your original estimates don’t hold and completing the project
entails more hours than you had presented in your budget, your ability
to provide accountability and a detailed, legible paper trail will help you

(03)9-13 IDG PricingEstimating 3/3/05 3:09 PM Page 107

The Passage of Time

■

You may find that the estimate you presented to a client is no longer
realistic if a significant period of time has lapsed since its submission. On

T ROUBLESHOOTING E STIMATES and P ROPOSALS

tremendously. (Now would be a good time to review the information
on knowing your process in chapter 6 and the sidebar of time management tips on page 67). The fact remains that good forms are necessary
to build a solid foundation of accountability.You need to develop a reputation of consistently providing services for the actual fees you quote
in your estimates. Occasionally, you will need to use the 15- to 20-percent fee overage provision that you have allowed for at the conclusion
of your estimates, but you certainly don’t want to make a habit of it. If
you do, sooner or later your clients will expect the surcharges, and your
estimates will be facing some tough credibility issues.
Forms create a paper trail, whether you’re filing them as hard copies
or within your hard drive. But proper documentation of time and
expenses is imperative if you are to track the reality of your endeavors.
If you are consistently forced to charge fees beyond those you quoted,
you need to take a hard look at several factors.Are you allowing enough
time to complete tasks? Are some members of your team slower than
others, and shouldn’t you be taking that into consideration when you’re
estimating? Do you keep forgetting certain outside costs that always
seem to show up after the job is finished?
Be prepared for clients to occasionally ask you for documentation to
justify your billing rates.While this won’t happen very often, sometimes
it will be necessary for you to review cost overages with clients. You
should be able to source a time sheet and expense log of some type at
any given moment throughout a job’s history.
If you can’t do that right now, this minute, just stop everything
you’re doing. I really mean it. Just stop. Take today, or tomorrow at the
latest. Cancel all your appointments. Take a deep breath and clear your
mind, and then begin a system of logging your time and expenses. Make
some forms of your own that will track everything you need to track.
There is never a perfect day to perform this task. If you’re a procrastinator, as most designers are, you’ll never get around to it unless you
cancel a day and devote yourself to form production. It shouldn’t take
you more than a day, and you will see immediate results.
It is important for you to realize how closely interconnected pricing,
estimating, and project management really are when you want to meet
your budgets and make a profit. Remember: No profit, quick burnout.
No self-employment, no fun!

107

The Interior Designer’s Guide to P RICING, E STIMATING, and B UDGETING

■

108

(03)9-13 IDG PricingEstimating 3/3/05 3:09 PM Page 108

several occasions I have had clients approve projects six months to a year
after I had given them an estimate. Most of these occurrences resulted
from my client’s original need to receive an estimate on a project simply
to plug the fees into his fiscal budget, knowing all the while that it
might not be produced for quite some time.This procedure is very typical for larger Fortune 500 clients, who must plan their budgets well in
advance. It is also typical in the residential sector, when an individual
gets sticker shock and needs to plan cash resources to complete the
project—not now, but later.
In your initial (master) meeting with a client, it is important for you
to verify when your client expects to be in production with the job you
are estimating. If you are indeed just establishing a budget and won’t be
producing the project for quite some time, it is very important to note
possible variables that might arise. These variables include any foreseeable rate increases that you may be considering because of staff, equipment, or fixed-cost growth. Such an estimate should be labeled “for
budget purposes’’ and include a simple disclosure of possible variables.
Quite often, a job will be postponed because your estimate is sitting
on your client’s desk and he hasn’t had time to review it, or he needs his
superior’s (or spouse’s) approval first. To avoid this delay, always try to
review your estimate face to face with your client. At the very least,
review it over the telephone and answer any questions that your client
may have.Then, ask the client when you can expect approval, so you can
put it into your production schedule. Be very clear that the project will
not be initiated until you have a signed, approved estimate.
If the promised date of approval comes and goes with no signature or
contact from the client, an informal note via fax or e-mail usually does
wonders. Most of the time, the estimate has moved to the bottom of the
pile on someone’s desk, and the client has wrongly assumed that you have
gotten started. If you still haven’t achieved desired results after a couple of
days, you have a good excuse to phone the client, check on your estimate’s
approval status, and ask if any clarification of the estimate is needed.
Warning: I haven’t researched Murphy’s Law enough to scientifically verify
this, but it seems like a project that’s prolonged unnecessarily often turns
into a nightmare project that goes on and on and drives everyone crazy!
Costs for items such as finishing and furnishing materials tend to
fluctuate over longer periods of time, especially with the fluctuating cost
of gasoline, which grossly affects freight, which in turn affects pricing
for plastics and many flooring materials.Always verify your outside suppliers’ quotes to determine how long their prices are good for. Make
sure that, if your painter quotes you a cost that is good for only thirty

(03)9-13 IDG PricingEstimating 3/3/05 3:09 PM Page 109

days from the date of that quote, you share that date and disclaimer on
your estimate to your client. It is very common for painters and other
suppliers to have a thirty-day clause in their quotes; you and your client
need to be very aware of cost overages that may be incurred by the delay
of a project.
Once a supplier accepts a purchase order from you detailing the
services or products at set, itemized costs, he is obligated to provide the
services or products at those particular costs—another good reason for
the wonderful world of forms and systems.

Ensuring Good Communication

T ROUBLESHOOTING E STIMATES and P ROPOSALS
■

The last thing you need is to have project costs exceed your estimate
because of poor communication.There is absolutely no excuse for this,
because you are, after all, in the communications industry. I have students and entry-level designers stare at me in disbelief when I break the
news to them that they are first and foremost communicators—before
and even when they are professional designers. It’s true.Your clients not
only expect you to communicate with their audiences by creating good,
visual, and environmental design solutions, but also expect (and deserve)
you to be an excellent communicator on all levels. This is the biggest
issue facing inexperienced designers and other individuals who want to
start their own firm or studio.
There are several easy steps you can follow that will open the doors
to good, effective client communication. (I have also dedicated an entire
section within chapter 13 to this subject.) Remember to always be upfront, honest, and considerate in terms of your clients’—and thus his or
her clients’—needs. Even before following the specific steps outlined,
you should evaluate your own basic communication strengths and
weaknesses by having a frank conversation about this with family members and any friends with whom you feel comfortable discussing sensitive issues. This suggestion is not made to make you feel defensive; it’s
just the quickest way to take a crash course in self-discovery where
communication issues are concerned.
Sooner or later, you will experience the uncomfortable (and seemingly irresolvable) situation of a problem that isn’t outlined, defined, or
acknowledged in your estimate, resulting in costly changes for a project.
When this happens, your clients will want you to absorb the additional
costs, and you will think that they’ve truly lost their mind this time.
There will be a moderate amount of finger-pointing, perhaps a voice
raised beyond the decibel level regarded as normal, and a feeling in your
stomach like you’ve just swallowed a bucket of peanut butter.

109

The Interior Designer’s Guide to P RICING, E STIMATING, and B UDGETING

■

110

(03)9-13 IDG PricingEstimating 3/3/05 3:09 PM Page 110

While experiencing this situation, try very hard to listen to your
client’s complaints without interrupting or blurting something out that
you may regret later. If you are the one who is announcing the problem
to your client, do so in a clear, uncritical, concise manner, and then listen
carefully as just described. After the issue has been reviewed, offer your
solution, if you have one. If you have not had enough time to assess who
is ultimately responsible, or if you feel really angry, now is not the time to
negotiate a resolution.Tell your client you will prioritize the matter today
and be in contact with him later regarding the situation. Go outside, take
big breaths (don’t hyperventilate!), tell yourself that there really is a silver
lining to all of this somewhere, and begin immediately to seek it out.
Take a good, objective look at your estimate. Does it clearly define
responsibility for who does what throughout the stages of the project?
Have you and any subcontractors you hired fulfilled the tasks that you
agreed to perform in your estimate, and have they been performed
accurately and on time? Has your client done the same with his
appointed task list and approval process? Perhaps you are answering yes
to the questions that involve you, and your client disagrees with you, or
vice versa.The sooner you can agree on who or what is really to blame,
the better. Sometimes it’s best to just let go of relatively minor points,
so you both can reach a conclusion and get on with your lives.
If you know in your heart of hearts that you are indeed at fault and
the problem is your mistake, then admit it, correct it, pay for it, and
move on. Should you decide to pass the buck to someone else or even
try to prove that your client is at fault, expect that client to avoid you
like the plague the next time you call on him for work or a referral.
Mistakes can be costly, but after all, if they are your fault, you will truly
gain client confidence and credibility (along with the probability of
ensuring a long-term relationship) if you take responsibility for them,
no matter what the cost might be to you. It might sound easy for me to
say and be tough for you to read, but it’s true. Set aside some rainy-day
funds—I’d suggest something around $25,000—for this purpose. Put
them into an interest-bearing account, and do something fun once a
year with the interest money you’ve acquired (assuming you don’t use
the set-aside funds).

When the Client Is Wrong
Of course, there will be times when your client is actually to blame for
something gone awry within the parameters of your project. If the
client insists that it is your fault and you don’t have the proper documentation to exonerate yourself, you only have six options:

(03)9-13 IDG PricingEstimating 3/3/05 3:09 PM Page 111

T ROUBLESHOOTING E STIMATES and P ROPOSALS
■

1. Do the obvious—quit. Walk away from the project and the client,
jump on your waiting stallion, and gallop away into the sunset. Of
course, expect to look behind you and see the bridges of client rapport
burning irreparably away. I only recommend this procedure when you
have given significant energy to the next three options.
2. Ask your client to split the additional costs required with you. This is
the quickest, most common, and usually the fairest approach to
resolving a dispute of this type. It instantly shows that you respect your
client and that you support him. Most problems that result in cost overages can be blamed on more than one party.When you know that you
could have avoided this issue if you had just done this or that, you probably are somewhat to blame yourself. Thus, splitting the costs is justifiable to everyone. If the costs involve third-party vendors, they will
usually give you a substantial discount for doing something the second
time around. Ask.
3. Confirm the additional charges in writing. If you have really done
your investigating, if you absolutely cannot afford to absorb any additional costs, and if the problems at hand were truly created by your
client, I suggest using the utmost diplomacy in a written confirmation
giving concise, accurate details of the events and circumstances that
brought you to your conclusion. Most clients respond better to written
explanations than to personal dialogue that puts them on the defensive.
Do follow your written explanation with a timely phone call after you
think your client has had enough time to digest the information.
Hopefully, your client will agree with you, and you can promise to help
him be more aware of such issues in the future. If the letter does not
work, it will, at the very least, prepare you for the next item.
4. Get a mediator. Your lawyer will have a list of mediators who are
used in an attempt to get both parties to sit down and come to an agreement together. I have had the opportunity to use a mediator once for a
situation regarding my favorite subcontractor. I had refused to pay a bill
because the contractor had made a materials change without notifying
me. The process was very positive for both of us. The mediator was
patient, intuitive, and knew what questions to ask in order to help us
make our own decisions. The outcome resulted in a positive, ongoing,
and very close relationship.
5. Get an arbitrator. When neither you nor your client will compromise, when you’ve gone around and around to no avail, consider
obtaining an arbitrator you both can agree on, who will do everything
to settle the matter with (and for) you.When it gets to this level of disagreement, a professional arbitrator, again located through your lawyer’s

111

The Interior Designer’s Guide to P RICING, E STIMATING, and B UDGETING

■

112

(03)9-13 IDG PricingEstimating 3/3/05 3:09 PM Page 112

office, is necessary. Many times, it might seem logical to ask a mutually
respected colleague to intervene; however, the chances of your colleague
remaining mutually respected are slim. It’s best to call in the services of
your attorney and your client’s attorney to decide specifically when,
where, and how you can resolve this issue. It’s common to include an
arbitration clause containing this information in contracts.
6. File a lawsuit against your client. This should only be done after
your attempts at arbitration fail to bring a resolution. Retaining the
services of an attorney to file suit is costly, time-consuming, and agonizing. Only if the amount of money you are disagreeing about is staggering and if you are absolutely certain that you had nothing to do with
the problems that occurred should you even consider filing suit. Before
you know it, your business will become everybody’s business, and you’ll
find yourself being questioned by vendors, colleagues, and possibly your
local press about what happened and why. It’s best not to discuss the
matter at all, even if you feel a great need to clear yourself.
I have never had to sue a client. I came very close a few years ago.
My firm had produced a project for a client with whom I had worked
closely for over five years. The project seemed tainted from the beginning, with the client making seemingly irrational design changes every
other week after he had approved them the week before. It turned out
that he was getting a lot of pressure from different committees that were
involved in certain phases of the project, and he kept making the
changes to appease others.
When the client was presented with a bill for what I had deemed a
totally unreasonable number of changes, he balked. Immediately, I
admitted that my staff had not notified him properly that he was
exceeding the budget we had agreed to in my original estimate. I had
been out of town when many of these changes occurred and felt
responsible at least for not communicating these overages to an established client. We both agreed to our mistakes and quite happily agreed
to split the additional costs. Unbeknownst to both of us at that time, my
client’s boss would not agree to the additional charges or any explanation of why or how the sequence of events had led to their occurrence.
I personally met with my client’s superior, with my client in attendance.The meeting was uncomfortable for all of us, to say the least. My
client and I left the meeting with no resolution and both of us feeling
pretty helpless. I was angry at what I deemed to be greatly unprofessional behavior on the superior’s part. On the advice of my attorney, I
wrote a detailed letter reviewing the entire project and cost overages. I

(03)9-13 IDG PricingEstimating 3/3/05 3:09 PM Page 113

suggested hiring a mutually agreed-upon arbitrator, and received an
unfriendly letter from the superior stating that my client was not at all
responsible (after he had admitted that he was) and that an arbitrator was
not a possibility.
Again, on the advice of my attorney, I wrote a stronger-toned letter
stating that if I did not hear from my client’s superior within thirty
days, I would unfortunately be forced into filing a lawsuit. In my letter,
I reviewed the project in its entirety, justifying overages and documenting when they had incurred. I again offered to settle the matter by
splitting the overages. Within ten days, I received a check for the
amount I had requested.
I have seen this client socially on many occasions, and he has always
been friendly to me. We have both acknowledged our disappointment
and bewilderment at his superior’s final decision.We are both sorry that
our long-term working relationship was brought to an end by something out of our control. Ultimately, we both learned the hard way.
Hopefully, this story will help you avoid similar situations in your future.

T ROUBLESHOOTING E STIMATES and P ROPOSALS
■

113

The Interior Designer’s Guide to P RICING, E STIMATING, and B UDGETING

■

114

(03)9-13 IDG PricingEstimating 3/3/05 3:09 PM Page 114

Case Study Interview
An Independent Designer on the Perils of Perfectionism
and Time Management: Lisa Schmitz, Kansas City, Missouri

Lisa Schmitz has been an independent designer for two years. She has
been an interior designer in Kansas City since 1988, first working for a
large firm specializing in architectural interior design, spending her first
nine years there 60 percent on commercial and 40 percent on residential. Her next several years were spent with a large firm strictly providing
commercial interior design solutions. As an independent designer, Lisa
is now focusing primarily on residential interior design, with many of
her clients now repeat clients from projects she worked on long ago.
Her professional growth as an independent has come primarily by word
of mouth, building upon her reputation.

Q. Lisa, you

have shared with me your penchant for perfectionism.
How do you organize your projects for maximum productivity and creativity (with profitability in mind, of course), knowing that you’ll probably get caught up in the perils of perfectionism?
A. Certain details need to be worked out early in the project, and it
is always beneficial, as the designer, to be involved in the project at
the preliminary stages. As I design details, the architecture can be
affected. The team can work together to incorporate these details
into the design documents rather than trying to simply add them
after the fact. At these early stages, I create quick sketches that show
concepts. These sketches then evolve into details. Sometimes these
three-dimensional sketches are more understandable than the construction documents.
Details are worked out with the contractor and architect. As a team,
each person has experience and information that can lead to the details
being implemented in the best manner—aesthetically, functionally, and
in a cost-effective manner. I keep all of these sketches in a three-ring
binder throughout the project. The binder has sections for meeting
notes, correspondence, details, invoices, and design sketches. I also purchase product for the client, so I often have sections pertaining to purchase orders. I may be working on over six projects at once and it is
often difficult to keep track of conversations, quotes, and daily conversations on all of these jobs. So each day, I date each sheet and use as
many sheets as I need. Therefore, I have all of my daily information in
one place. I can then copy the pages as needed and place them in the
appropriate job file.

(03)9-13 IDG PricingEstimating 3/3/05 3:09 PM Page 115

The perfectionism part is difficult in that it takes an enormous
amount of time to research, coordinate, and relay the needed information in order to get what I envision. I rely heavily on sources that I have
accumulated through the years.There are some people who have wonderful craftsmanship, and I may need to push them to create what is new
to them.There is always risk in doing that, since there may not be photographs to show them what I desire. I rely on magazine images, sketches,
and conversation to work out the best construction, and must listen to
their input as to the feasibility.

T ROUBLESHOOTING E STIMATES and P ROPOSALS
■

Q. Will you share an example of a project that went “too far” either
because you or your client got caught up in the spiraling vortex of not
knowing when to stop? Was the project profitable for you—why
or why not?
A. I am working on a project now for a client whose office I
redesigned several years ago.This client is very, very detail oriented. He
has a great design sense, and it is very demanding to meet his ideas. I
don’t say it negatively—I say it in that he is very meticulous in how
he stores his cooking equipment and everything in his closets—so
there is a huge amount of organizational detail. Every spoon and every
pot and pan has to be accounted for in the kitchen; and with that he
had a great design sense with regard to organization and aesthetics.
The client is cognizant of his perfectionism. He and I keep track of
my time and he understands that in order to get it the way that he
wants it is going to take time. So I am lucky that he understands that.
Originally, I had given him a cost up front of what I assumed to
be a not-to-exceed number, having bumped it up a fair amount
knowing the complexity and his penchant for details. But now the
project has changed completely, with my handling both the architectural and construction administration and the hiring and managing of
a structural engineer. The complexity and the detail grew from the
original agreement, which was supposed to be a nine-month
project—and we are still in the “finishing” stages, and it will be a year
next month. As he increased my scope, he understood that my original estimate was obsolete and has been very respectful about paying
me a strictly hourly rate after I agreed on not gaining a profit through
the products purchased.
This has worked out really well for me, because I bill him along with
my detailed time sheets, and since he himself is a lawyer billing his own
clients this way, he understands my invoices without challenge.

115

The Interior Designer’s Guide to P RICING, E STIMATING, and B UDGETING

■

116

(03)9-13 IDG PricingEstimating 3/3/05 3:09 PM Page 116

Q. What type of “paper trail” do you use to ensure good communication between you and your clients?
sketches, as mentioned above, as well as construction documents, show the general concept of the project. As a project is being
developed, there is a series of plans and plan revisions. It is important to
date each set as to the revisions, and then copy the client.This shows the
development of the project. This is also true of meeting notes. It is
important to create meeting notes to document the conversations and
decisions.These also should be copied to the client. E-mail is also now
a wonderful way to communicate certain decisions or changes. These
quick notes are easy to save in the project file.
Things have gotten a little more complicated in the area of purchasing. I usually present a quote to the client with the item description
and cost.These should have a signature of approval from the client.The
more detail you can list on the quote, the more you are covered.

A. The

Q. Will you give us an example of a project you were involved in when
the client made a mistake, was wrong about something, and how you
resolved the issue?
A. I recently had twenty-one custom pillows made for a client, all of
them filled with 50 percent down and 50 percent goose.This combination of fill is ideal and presents a beautiful, fluffy pillow with perfect
form. The client verbally approved the pillows, and the fill matched
some of the existing pillows that the client already owned. After delivering the pillows, the client informed me that she was allergic to down
and did not want the pillows if they were filled with down. I am in the
process of getting synthetic fill for the pillows and trying to determine
a resolution.
I have another client that needs several of the same sizes of forms,
so I will sell those forms to her. The other forms I may have to stock
myself and hope to sell at another date. If I had written on my quote
that the fill was down, and the client had approved it as written, she
would have been responsible. Since I do not have proof that I verbally
stated the content of the pillows, I am responsible. The client said she
would pay for the forms, but knowing that I was partially responsible,
I do not want to charge her the full cost, so I plan to split it with her
fifty-fifty.

(03)9-13 IDG PricingEstimating 3/3/05 3:09 PM Page 117

Successfully Establishing
and Managing Budgets

t’s really important for your design skills to include a strong
knowledge of finished implementation; this will help you
greatly when you need to produce cost-conscious projects.
There are many implementation techniques that you can use to
please your clients when they want the whole world but can
only afford a small U.S. state. Some spaces work better when
they aren’t over-designed anyway.

Learning Cost Consciousness
Finding affordable alternatives can be a fun and interesting challenge. There are lots of ways to achieve great results without sacrificing creativity. Some of the most common cost-cutting
alternatives include:
■

■

Working within the existing footprint, not removing walls or
major utilities
Creating a rich or hi-tech look with off-the-shelf furnishings
from discount catalogs or places like IKEA
Changing just accessories—like new window coverings,
pillows, and area carpets, instead of lighting, windows, and
doors—can completely revive a tired space
Determining what is salvageable by plugging in existing
room and furniture sizes into the outstanding design software now available
Selecting an all-new color palette to complement what
already exists and changing wall colors only

Of course, you could probably add twenty items or more to
this list.The reason I’ve mentioned these possibilities at all is to get
you to consider design or production alternatives before you consider compromising your rates. In addition, builders, electricians,

The Interior Designer’s Guide to P RICING, E STIMATING, and B UDGETING

■

118

(03)9-13 IDG PricingEstimating 3/3/05 3:09 PM Page 118

and other subcontractors are very credible sources for acquiring samples and, upon request, ideas for cost-conscious design. I also mentioned earlier that putting a client’s needs into tiers of phases, or into a
series of projects (such as implementing a portion of the project per
month at a steady yet effective pace) is a great way to extend the budget
and be cost conscious.
Using an appropriate format for presentations (that is, not overdoing
it) might save you considerable time, and, thus, money. Back in the estimating stage of your project, you should have decided exactly what type
of presentation your client would require to obtain approval for your
design concepts.
As my staff and I develop client relationships and trust levels increase,
the type of presentations we show tends to change as well. Our biggest
client at the moment has gotten to a point of approving our design concepts based on a fax showing simple black-and-white marker drawings.
This way, the client’s staff usually gets to see a lot more than just one
idea; they get to see them all. This is a somewhat unusual case because
the decision makers in the design department are very creative individuals themselves and have the visual sense to say,“Go for it” or,“You guys
are out of your minds!”
The most expensive presentation is computer-generated and/or 3Dmodeled, and is presented to the client in all its finished glory.You and
I know that a comprehensive presentation of this magnitude really
means that the project is at least 75 percent approved at this point; and
if the client hates it and you have to start over, you’ve got a lot tied up
that gets tossed in the trash. For those occasions when the client loves
it, however, and you only need to tweak a little here and there, you can
go singing and dancing into the wee hours because finishing the project
becomes a somewhat simple implementation task.
A compromise between the quickie black-and-white doodles and
the elaborate computer comps is what I call the “idea board.” These
come in handy when a client isn’t sure what they want or whether they
want to hire my firm to produce their project. I usually charge a flat rate
of $2,400 and show one or two boards with a mixture of sketched and
photographed comparative elements (from magazines or other trade
publications) that will give the client a very good idea of where our
thoughts are headed for their project.
Clients have been very receptive to these idea boards. They don’t
have to invest a lot of money up front, and they have more input on the
direction we’re taking a project before we go too far with it. A solid 90
percent of the time, our idea boards turn into full-fledged projects. Our

(03)9-13 IDG PricingEstimating 3/3/05 3:09 PM Page 119

S UCCESSFULLY E STABLISHING and M ANAGING B UDGETS
■

next presentation after these initial boards is usually a completed presentation that is not a huge surprise to the client because he is familiar with
and has approved our initial concepts and knows what to expect.
Another place to be cost-conscious is in the overrun of custom fabrication. Designer beware: Charges can be incurred by overruns of
actual fabrics, specific moldings, or other detail elements—quantities
over and above the exact quantity you have specified on your client’s
behalf. Manufacturers almost always make some overruns, often with
the initial part of the manufacturing run having some flaws.
A typical overrun, which can be expected with your larger manufactured orders, is about 10 percent.The press is going so fast that, in the
time it takes to shut it down, you have overruns. Negotiate overruns to
be very modestly priced (about 50 percent of normal cost is standard),
as they will be necessary on most large-scale custom projects (someone
will make a cutting mistake on the tile or the fabric). Most larger clients
will want the overruns for future use, if necessary—that is, if an installed
tile cracks or a piece of upholstery is irreparably harmed. A client who
is watching pennies and having you research cost-cutting alternatives,
on the other hand, probably won’t want any overruns or produced elements at all—much less expect to pay for them. To further complicate
the matter, most vendors usually do expect to be paid for overruns,
unless you specify otherwise up front.
Since overruns are a conventional, established practice for a lot of
vendors, but may be news to your client, it’s important to always ask
your clients and your vendors beforehand what their expectations of
overruns are and specifically how they want to handle them.
The way in which we communicate and contact our clients has a lot
to do with cost-conscious design. After all, any time spent on a project
means time that should be billed to that particular job, whether it’s
design time or client-meeting time. Clients do not need to know (at
least, they don’t need to be reminded with a bill for every meeting) that
they are actually being billed for the time you or your staff spend with
them. Remember, you budgeted time for client meetings when you
prepared your estimate, so you should be covered within your total estimate amount.
I can’t tell you how often clients have complained about many of my
firm’s competitors sending them bills for things like fifteen-minute
phone calls and forty-five-minute meetings. The general thinking is
how unthinking of designers to bill as though they were attorneys!
While recouping fees for the significant amount of meeting time
required before and during a project’s life span is imperative, how you

119

The Interior Designer’s Guide to P RICING, E STIMATING, and B UDGETING

■

120

(03)9-13 IDG PricingEstimating 3/3/05 3:09 PM Page 120

obtain those fees from your client is open for interpretation. And it can
be done in a much friendlier, more acceptable way! I lump what I refer
to on my estimates as “meeting/coordination time” into one conservative amount. If I know going in that the client requires a lot of handholding and will not be amenable to assigning dollars for meetings, I
bury the meeting costs into the creative.

Using Cost-Conscious Design
Another good point regarding cost consciousness within the design
process is to think about who represents your firm at client meetings. I
used to think that I personally needed to be at every single meeting, no
matter how big or how small. As business has grown in other cities and
states, this is no longer physically possible.
With most projects, a senior designer or staff equivalent (I hate titles,
and we don’t have them on our business cards) attends every initial
client meeting (that is, every master meeting for a new client) to review
the project from a creative standpoint.As our sales and customer service
peoples’ self-confidence grows, and as they obtain work from ongoing
clients, they have gotten to a point where they can assess projects initially by themselves and properly communicate that information back to
us—at least on small and medium-sized projects.
On larger projects, I have found it very helpful to include, along with
me, a senior and junior designer, and, in some cases, our administration/resource manager in the master meeting. Doing this is more cost
efficient for us in two ways: 1) it has saved a lot of time, since I don’t
have to explain the project to my support staff—they get firsthand
information from the client themselves; and 2) the client and my support staff are given the opportunity to meet and interact with each
other. This builds staff morale and client trust. It also gives you, your
senior and junior designers, or any other executive staff great freedom
from absolutely needing to be at every future meeting or from needing
to be involved in every phone conversation regarding the project. This
is key if you want to avoid micromanagement.
When you’re talking about cost-conscious design, client involvement at several different levels can be either helpful or detrimental.
Client involvement becomes most necessary when unexpected issues
arise in the creative or implementation phases of a project. Some significant examples of this are 1) a new, better idea surfaces at your studio
regarding placement or finishing techniques that will be more costly
than your approved estimate; or 2) after the design is completed, you
realize that the furnishings you specified in your original estimate are

(03)9-13 IDG PricingEstimating 3/3/05 3:09 PM Page 121

not the best selection for the project after all, and the new items you
would like to use raise the final costs beyond budget. Of course, there
are many examples we could list here, but these are the two most
common issues that seem to arise.
Obviously, when costs are going to go up, you need approval from
your client. In the two cases described above, you won’t always get it.
Sometimes, clients can agree that maybe you’ve come up with a better
idea, but the budget established is one that they need to adhere to.The
same thing goes for choosing a more expensive furniture product after
the original estimate is approved.There are also occasions when a client
really wants to make the change but just can’t because of increased costs.
Whenever possible, I discuss this matter with my subcontractors and
sometimes succeed, for example, in having them reduce their costs to
match my needs. We’ve also been known to throw in some extra time
and not charge the client for it if we feel that we could profit from
having a better sample for our portfolio or if the client works with us
frequently and appreciates our endeavors.

The Three Big D s to Cost-Conscious Design
1.

■

In these ever-changing, computer-driven design times, it is extremely
important to keep up with what’s happening in the industry. This may
seem a little weird, but I’m about to get on a soapbox about spending
money while we’re in the midst of talking about being cost conscious.
To use a cliché, sometimes you have to spend money to make money.
Things like new software (or updates for software), software seminars,
trade shows, time management workshops, and other important educational opportunities do take a day or two away from actual work now and
then, and they do cost money. But you need (at least sometimes) to take
the time and spend the money. (That’s why our discussion of fixed and
unfixed expenses way back in chapter 1 includes the need for such items.)

S UCCESSFULLY E STABLISHING and M ANAGING B UDGETS

Discipline. Stick to your schedules! Don’t over-perfect, over-design,
or procrastinate.
Delegate. Use support staff whenever possible. Hire an office
manager and a traffic manager to make your firm more efficient.
Direct. Use your expertise to show others what to do and how to
do it. Let your discerning eye decide what to improve at each
design phase.

121

The Interior Designer’s Guide to P RICING, E STIMATING, and B UDGETING

■

122

(03)9-13 IDG PricingEstimating 3/3/05 3:09 PM Page 122

As the owner of your firm, you will have to decide when and where
to spend the extra money necessary to keep things up and running to
the standards you have created and want to maintain. Essentially, you
could look at such expenditures as lowering your bottom line. I know
a lot of firm owners who get by with the minimum and are very negative about spending their profits to enlighten staff or expand their
equipment base to include the constant stream of next-level technology.
My opinion is that spending money on things like this is really
necessary for my staff and me. It helps everyone stay interested, focused,
and loyal to the firm. Sure, you have to find a balance of when and how
to spend the money; in tighter times, you just don’t do it. After having
the good fortune to be able to run my firm as long as I have, struggling
as a group through the tough times (and there were, indeed, a couple of
years of very tough times) only proved to me that spending money for
what I like to define as “improvements” turned out to be a great investment in my firm’s future. It’s almost like glue to a creaky chair or plant
food to a wilting plant.You can still sit on the creaky chair for a few

Recap: Five Basic Strategies for Controlling Costs
1.

Before you begin a project, review the budgeted time and costs
for each phase of the project. Pass this information along to any
support staff involved.
Encourage your staff to inform you immediately when they are
going over budget in any area, or if they have any problems with
the allotted time you have given them to perform a task.
Update your client immediately if he is the source of any cost
overages being incurred. Obtain approval of a revised estimate,
or use a change-order form to get additional costs approved.
If you do underestimate your time, don’t cut corners by using
lower-quality subcontractors or cheaper paint brands for finishes
in order to recoup your losses. You and your client will be
disappointed in the outcome.
Make all staff members responsible for processing their own
detailed purchase orders and time sheets within the parameters
of the system you have established together. Do not be lax in
enforcing this policy once it has been put into play.

(03)9-13 IDG PricingEstimating 3/3/05 3:09 PM Page 123

years, and the plant is not going to die for a while, but both will benefit
greatly from a little time and money spent on care and nourishment.

Educating Your Client

S UCCESSFULLY E STABLISHING and M ANAGING B UDGETS
■

In your original master meeting you should determine your client’s
knowledge regarding detailed aspects of the interior design industry and
how much he really understands your work process.Your estimate may
contain technical jargon only understood by people in our industry, and
you may be surprised at how many times you will need to explain certain processes. Many designers are fooled into thinking that a client
who is hiring their services understands industry vocabulary simply by
general osmosis.
Explaining technical processes in layman’s terms will be the
number-one way you’ll need to educate your client. Try to answer
all technical questions before you present your estimate. If your
client is not familiar with the processes, review the finished estimate
with him in person. Then, as the job is progressing, show him the
processes as they occur, and invite him to experience the craftsmanship of the project firsthand so that he not only can appreciate your
expertise but also feel more confident delegating these types of projects in the future.
Does your client need (or want) a crash course in technical education? Give it to him on the spot, if so. If you determine in your initial meeting with your client that he is not totally competent and
wants your help, this is your cue to develop a long-term relationship.
No one likes being in the position of not knowing. And if you can
embrace the teaching process and not be condescending, you’ll have
a client for life.
A more dangerous scenario is the client who thinks he knows everything, and as you hopelessly try to explain the realities of a situation,
your words fall on deaf ears. This happens way too often in large corporations, where less-experienced design buyers are intimidated, preferring to be bullies rather than eager students.When you experience these
types of clients, let them blow off all the knowledge in their little brains
and walk away. Choose your moment carefully to reintroduce the subject at a later date, reminding your client about it in a casual fashion,
such as, “You know when we were talking the other day about roll-on
versus spray painting for the molding finishes, and we disagreed? Why
don’t we talk to Mr. Favorite Painter to find the answer—maybe we’re
both wrong!?”

123

The Interior Designer’s Guide to P RICING, E STIMATING, and B UDGETING

■

124

(03)9-13 IDG PricingEstimating 3/3/05 3:09 PM Page 124

A few proactive ideas follow with regard to specific educational explanations I have often confronted in the industry:
■

■

If you need a digital copy of your client’s logo in a “JPEG” or “TIFF”
format and he doesn’t know what that means, you probably won’t
even know it until you receive a differently formatted logo in your
e-mail in-box. Pre-digital days called for “camera-ready” logos, which
are usually on slick, high-quality paper that you can scan yourself to
create a digital file. If the client is at a total loss or seems flustered by
your request, ask if there is an internal graphics department that might
be able to give you either a hard copy or a digital version.
When deciding who will manage subcontractors, you will quickly
determine if your client has a clue as to what this means in total. For
quality-control purposes, you will want to at least coordinate your
outside suppliers. You should explain the basic reasons for your
decisions to your client. For example, tell them, “Choosing a subcontractor depends on who can most proficiently produce the job
from quality and economic standpoints,” and describe some of the
ways to judge this.
Ask your client how much education she would like throughout the
production of her project. Some clients want to be more involved
than others. Ultimately, however, you will need to involve your
client at the levels that you feel comfortable with.
Invite your client to your studio so that he can see how you produce
a project. It is very helpful for clients to see just how time-intensive
project resolution really is. Your efforts will be more appreciated
after he has a general knowledge of how the design world spins.

I realize these explanations might sound elementary, but don’t ever take
for granted that every client you have is aware of these common scenarios.

Fitting Pricing to the Budget
Deciding whether or not you can fit an estimate into a client’s existing
budget depends somewhat on what type of fee structure you’ve chosen
to use. Fitting an estimate to a budget is easier with the value-pricing
method: you can simply determine if a project is worth the dollar
amount that the client has budgeted and inform the client of your decision to move forward or move out!

(03)9-13 IDG PricingEstimating 3/3/05 3:09 PM Page 125

Remember, you do have options: bartering, for example, or billing
your client over an extended period of time so the amount better fits his
allotted budget (which might be set up for monthly or quarterly disbursements). Perhaps you can creatively scale the project itself so that certain phases can coincide with given budget time frames. For example,
concept work, presentation, resourcing, and palette selection might be
done in one quarter, finish and furnishings selection the next quarter,
implementation of construction and finishes in the third quarter, and furniture/accessories purchase and installation in the fourth quarter.
My own feeling is that you don’t compromise your fees unless one
of two cases applies: either you must absolutely have the job for your
portfolio, or else you’re dealing with a long-term client who has a wellestablished history of giving you profitable assignment—and you’re
really doing him a favor.

Cost Control and Time Management

S UCCESSFULLY E STABLISHING and M ANAGING B UDGETS
■

I hope I don’t sound like a broken record, but once again, I’ll tell you
that the best strategy for cost control is forms (written-out figures and
plans, as opposed to just an idea of what things should be). Forms are
the key to controlling costs.Whether the forms are in the template of a
project-management program or are developed to be used manually,
they should show you at a glance how much time you have on a project,
what your current costs are, and if you are on schedule for a project at
any given date. The goal is for the system you establish to give you an
instant status report on a job whenever you want it.
So, you say, you have the information at hand, now what do you do
with it? Control and discipline! You should look at the project management side of your projects about as often as you look at them from your
discerning, creative vantage point.
Before a project is started, share with your support staff how much
time is budgeted for them to spend on each project task. Then, as the
project progresses, update yourself on the real amount of time spent for
various tasks. If more time than you allowed for in your estimate is being
incurred, you need to immediately discern why and do something
about it. There are several possibilities: someone is over-perfecting,
someone is not sure what to do or how they should be doing something, you underestimated the time needed, or the client is slowing
progress in some way.Whatever the reason, appropriate action should be
taken to make a positive change.
Each of the scenarios given above has been dealt with elsewhere in
this book, except for the issue of a staff member not being sure what to

125

The Interior Designer’s Guide to P RICING, E STIMATING, and B UDGETING

■

126

(03)9-13 IDG PricingEstimating 3/3/05 3:09 PM Page 126

do or how she should be doing it. Reality bites in this particular example,
and you can probably blame it on being too busy and fragmented yourself—thus, the communication breakdown. Chalk it up to experience, and
patiently take the time to explain the task more thoroughly.
If purchase orders have been properly submitted in great detail for
all outside services and material objects you will require, overages on
actual dollars spent should be obsolete. In the event that you are incurring rush charges from service bureaus that you did not allow for in
your original estimate, expect these overages to come out of your profit
margin—ouch! This either means that you’re incredibly busy or you have
incredible inefficiencies somewhere. Needless to say, you’ll have to find
the problem and deal with it.
Time sheets are really the only way to track hours spent on project
tasks. It doesn’t matter whether you record these manually or within a
software program, but it is imperative to compare the actual time
required to the estimated time allotted. Many firms only mandate the
maintenance of time sheets for new employees; performance for established employees is measured more directly—by the amount of work
produced and the profit generated by that work. Strategy for controlling
total hours spent on projects may include a bonus incentive for your
employees—the more work accomplished and the more profitable that
work is, the more money there is for bonuses.
Unless you are working alone and have strictly placed a value price
on a project, time sheets will be instrumental in your profitability.When
I started my business, I was actually a freelancer and had a studio in my
home for the first two years. I never kept time sheets and found myself
floating from the studio out to the deck to get some sun, into the
laundry room to do a load of whites, and then back to the studio!
Consequently, I was working about eighteen hours a day. Fragmenting
my studio time actually decreased my productivity level and doubled
the amount of time I had originally budgeted for my projects. This
became apparent to me only after I started keeping time sheets.
A larger staff requires an internal check system for hours logged to
each project and for time sheets submitted on a timely basis. Delegate
this check task to someone or do it yourself if you have to. It’s the only
way to bring balance and profitability into an otherwise timeless world
that can quickly go careening out of control and into negative profitability. What work is and isn’t billable to your client is reviewed in
chapter 6.
However, there are a few unique situations I’d like to point out that
pertain to project management. One fact of life is that the hours spent

(03)9-13 IDG PricingEstimating 3/3/05 3:09 PM Page 127

The Quintessential Office Manager

■

Hiring a good office manager could be the most important accomplishment the owner of an interior design studio ever realizes with
regard to staying on budget. Hovering above the design awards and
industry-magazine features, behind the glory of obtaining the “perfect”
account and hiring the best creative people to support you, lies the
magical umbrella that keeps you and everybody else out of the storm,
safe and dry—your office manager!
This wonderful person will organize everything regarding the
administrative aspect of your business. She will communicate beautifully
with clients and vendors. With the touch of a button or the wave of a
hand, she will show you updated status reports regarding time and
expenses logged per project. A reassuring smile will ensure you that she
has indeed billed the project that was finished yesterday and that there
is enough money in your checking account to cover payroll

S UCCESSFULLY E STABLISHING and M ANAGING B UDGETS

on project-management tasks are all nonbillable hours. On pages 12–16
while we were determining your hourly rate, I noted that in no way are
you or your staff members capable of billing a forty-hour week (unless
you are actually working fifty-plus hours a week).We allowed ten hours
a week for miscellaneous office tasks like cleaning up and backing up
computer systems. Properly maintaining time sheets, filling out information on job jackets, and so on, also fall into this nonbillable category.
In order to get an accurate count of hours that are truly billable, you
need to encourage respect for and the honest use of the time-sheet
system within your business. Falsifying time-sheet hours is totally unacceptable, and you will see whether this is happening when you (or
your designated staff member) review them. I’ve had great luck in
obtaining accurate time sheets by personally discussing their importance
with new staff members and instituting an overtime policy: No overtime hours are to be incurred without a simple overtime-approval form
being authorized by me or my senior designers.
Nonbillable hours can also result from having an entry-level or inexperienced staff person performing a task that is not within his or her
realm of expertise. In other words, someone who is less experienced
may take twice as many hours to perform a task, but those additional
hours can’t fairly be charged to the unsuspecting client. On the other
hand, it is important to give lower-level employees the opportunity to
grow and learn.This will make them more efficient in what they do, and
more of their hours will be billable. In the long run, having them spend
more time now will benefit both of you.

127

The Interior Designer’s Guide to P RICING, E STIMATING, and B UDGETING

■

128

(03)9-13 IDG PricingEstimating 3/3/05 3:09 PM Page 128

Here are ten tips to finding and hiring the perfect office manager:
1.

Network. Tell friends, family, and colleagues that you are looking
for an office manager and explain the qualifications for the position.
First impressions count. If a candidate for your new position arrives
at your office thirty minutes late, wearing her breakfast (I’ve seen
someone actually do this), it’s a good indication that she’s not really
who you’re looking for.
Review the candidate’s résumé and cover letter carefully for
grammatical and spelling errors. If she is careless with these allimportant documents, think how she will be with the responsibilities you’ve outlined for her.
During the interviewing process, be critical about articulation skills,
eye contact, and levels of self-confidence that the candidate
presents. These are three very crucial strengths that a good office
manager must project.
Ask for references from prior jobs, and personally contact at least
three of them. Ask previous employers about the candidate’s
promptness, English and math skills, and the levels of loyalty and
trust the employer experienced with this person.
Ensure that the candidate is not overqualified for the position. There
are a lot of college graduates and otherwise-overqualified people

tomorrow—and then some! She reminds staff that time sheets and purchase orders are necessary to complete the assigned tasks properly, and
only screams at them if she gets absolutely no results otherwise.
People with these great dispositions and capabilities do exist,
although they are truly a challenge to find.Without an office manager,
you may find yourself totally bogged down with tasks like those I’ve
described, and more than likely, those tasks are not what you do best. If
you find yourself spending fifteen or more hours per week on administrative responsibilities, you really need to consider hiring an office manager.The amount of time you will regain and thus bill out at your own
hourly rate will greatly supersede the moneys you will invest in the
right office manager.

The Traffic Manager
Traffic managers (or contract managers, as some people call them) are a
must when you find that there simply are not enough hours in the day to

(03)9-13 IDG PricingEstimating 3/3/05 3:09 PM Page 129

07.

08.

09.

10.

who are desperate to find a job and think that they can get one in
office management quite easily. These types will not last long in
your organization unless they are challenged by growth opportunities. If growth realistically does not exist in the position you have
to offer, don’t hire them.
Don’t hire a designer who can’t find a design job and who appears
to have office management skills (lots of us do). This person will
become frustrated being part of a team where she cannot express
or use her creative skills.
Offer a competitive salary and benefits that rival similar corporate
positions in your area. You want this person to enjoy a long-term
working relationship with you, so you must respect her long-term
needs.
If you’re horrible at math and can’t decide whether the person you
want to hire is the perfect candidate or not, have your CPA or tax
accountant speak with him and ask pertinent questions regarding
the person’s technical capabilities.
Take your favorite candidate to lunch. It’s amazing what you can
learn over a meal. Observe manners and poise, and let the
informal environment help you get acquainted.
S UCCESSFULLY E STABLISHING and M ANAGING B UDGETS
■

perform tasks such as buying and coordinating subcontractor services,
making punch-list and quality-control decisions with clients, and making
sure your staff is staying on schedule. The traffic person acts as a liaison
between you and your clients and between you and your other outside vendors to ensure that projects flow smoothly and proficiently. It is the traffic
manager’s responsibility to keep your staff within budgeted hours and to
alert the sales or account person when a project is going over budget.
Acquiring the services of a seasoned traffic manager may be quite
costly and will add a substantial amount to your fixed cost list, which
will probably result in higher hourly rates for your firm. A traffic manager’s time is only about 35 percent billable, but you can change that if
you allow a certain amount of time for traffic tasks within your estimate.
Obviously, this will cause your per-project rates to increase; however, if
you’ve grown to need these services on a full-time basis, your clientele
will probably not question you about the several hundred dollars extra
that your current estimates reflect.

129

The Interior Designer’s Guide to P RICING, E STIMATING, and B UDGETING

■

130

(03)9-13 IDG PricingEstimating 3/3/05 3:09 PM Page 130

Announce your firm’s growth and the addition of this important
member to your team by sending out a mailing to all your clients and
vendors. In your mailing, list the benefits your clients will immediately
realize. Just like the office manager, the traffic specialist will really take
the pressure off you and allow you to explore the opportunities of doing
your best in the things you do best.

The Ten Key Tasks of a Traffic Manager
01.
02.

03.
04.
05.
06.

07.
08.

09.
10.

Buy all outside services that pertain to project implementation.
Assist or complete the estimate process by obtaining costs for all
elements pertinent to projects.
Review final designs and finishes with all subcontractors.
Ensure that the staff stays on the given schedule.
Update and revise the schedule for staff, clients, and vendors.
Scrutinize for color and finish accuracy as soon as each color or
finish is applied.
Punch list all projects before the client does.
Obtain delivery information from vendors and relay that information to the client and necessary installation people.
Update you daily on each project for which they are responsible.
Follow through with the client to ensure accurate delivery
and satisfaction.

Successfully establishing and managing project budgets relies on
several people working in tandem. It’s difficult—especially for a solo
designer—to let go of control and rely on others.The sidebar information in this chapter will be particularly helpful in propelling yourself
into success mode. Even if you cannot afford an office or traffic manager,
someone—probably you—will need to perform these responsibilities to
ensure proficiency and profitability.

(03)9-13 IDG PricingEstimating 3/3/05 3:09 PM Page 131

Negotiating

here are numerous books dedicated to the art of negotiating,
but I wanted to include tips specific to interior designers in
this book because I think our business is unique in its dynamics
of negotiation. Negotiations are constantly and simultaneously
taking place regarding almost every aspect of our projects. I
cannot think of any other profession that incessantly finds its
members whining more about losing the core value of their
endeavors, and their complaints so often falling on deaf ears.

How to Show Them You’re Worth It
I tell my students, interns, and entry-level designers over and
over again that they are first and foremost salespeople. Not interior designers, artisans, environmental communicators, lovers of
colors and words—none of these things; they’re salespeople,
every one of them. And effective salespeople—if they are going
to make a profit—are good at negotiating. No one ever believes
me until they show me their first finished project.Typically, any
senior designer will ask his or her support staff questions, challenging them, “Why this blue, why that texture, why that style
of furniture?” The replies given are all elements of negotiation.
The client will ask the senior designer similar questions. We
designers give answers in defense of our selections.There is usually rebuttal, more questioning, and more answering. A debate
may ensue. Negotiation squads (you!) are brought in. Every time
we show design solutions of any type, we go into the same territory. Better to have a diverse stash of thoughts, words, and
actions, so we can rise above the ensuing stress and get the results
we want.
The first place in a project where we have to negotiate is
usually when we present the estimate, or shortly thereafter.This
is your number-one opportunity to put your stars on the ceiling.

The Interior Designer’s Guide to P RICING, E STIMATING, and B UDGETING

■

132

(03)9-13 IDG PricingEstimating 3/3/05 3:09 PM Page 132

If it is a new client, or one who hasn’t seen your work for quite a while,
give her a dog and pony show. Before talking numbers, show your audience photos or a video (or create a CD) of completed work that is relevant to your proposed estimate. If you don’t have any relevant work,
show new clients the latest and greatest example of a project you’ve
done for a client whose name they will recognize. If you don’t have this
either, have a brief discussion first about why your firm is the right
choice for this specific project. Seek out definitive and qualitative reasons. For example, you received some generous press in the local newspaper for a project that originally had many challenges.
Obtain letters of recommendation for your firm’s outstanding
achievements—quantitative and qualitative information that will give
you credibility in the eyes of this new client. Show them you’re worth
the pricing you’re asking by never literally saying it. This is a competitive industry, and you need to find a reason and a way to distinguish
yourself from either your competitors or, possibly, even your own history. Reinvent yourself every time you get the opportunity to present.
Keep things fresh and new.
One of my fondest presentation memories is the time one of my
graphic design partners and I presented an over-the-edge idea to a
rather conservative client. The client had been our largest client for
almost three years.We knew each other well; we had developed personal
relationships and had great camaraderie. The staff had asked us to
develop a totally new look for its national-print consumer advertising.
We were not the biggest advertising experts; we did mostly business-tobusiness. But we knew the client’s consumers intimately from having
worked so closely with its collateral development for three years. I was
growing fearful, however, having had the account so long, that perhaps
the client was getting tired of us, and perhaps vice versa.
We had a blast designing the new ad formats, developing unique
illustration styles and graphic design standards very new to the market.
Prior to the presentation, we sent cheapie, rock ’n’ roll band–style flyers
to the client’s entire advertising department, with some very cheesy
graphics announcing “Ban” Jovi live and in concert in their conference
room at our said meeting time in their city and state.This meeting was
for the advertising department staff only. No big VPs or merchandising
people.We knew we were dealing with a safe crowd.
The day of the presentation, we arrived with a banjo, in overalls and
flannel shirts, complete with karaoke equipment and a script matching
the tune of the Beverly Hillbillies theme song.The script announced our
new ideas amidst the laughter and tears of our surprised friends and

(03)9-13 IDG PricingEstimating 3/3/05 3:09 PM Page 133

colleagues.We had the guts to do something so strange and unheard-of
to them that we couldn’t even get finished because the roar in the conference room grew deafening. After the wildly successful presentation,
we distributed souvenir Ban Jovi concert T-shirts.The noise was so loud
that, fortunately or unfortunately, VPs and other senior execs were soon
popping their heads into the conference room to see what was going
on. Instead of waiting for the ad department to present the work to
them, we got to do it firsthand, to our delight and victory. It was certainly the most fun I’ve ever had presenting anything. And it worked!
Price became the low man on the totem pole because there were too
many other diversions to sway our clients from their typical focus.
This isn’t to say that silly gimmicks work every time. Remember, we
knew every person at that eight-person table quite well.We knew their
sense of humor and could take what we knew and mesh it into our
script to establish personal connections and familiarities. Showing your
own clients that you’re worth it will come from your own individuality
and creativity. The point I am trying to share with you is that being
proactive and original can enhance your performance—in presentations, conversations, and negotiations. Because ultimately, negotiations
are always lurking—whether it’s to challenge price, particular design
selections, or finished manufacturing decisions.

Discussing Rates and Fees

N EGOTIATING
■

There will certainly be many occasions when you will need to justify
the rates and fees that you propose in your estimates. About 50 percent
of the time, clients will ask me how I arrived at my figures. It’s interesting to note that they usually request an explanation on design fees,
but not on the fees of subcontractors like painters and cabinetmakers. I
think that, psychologically, clients understand that these artisans have
ongoing equipment purchases to make, and since the results of their
work are more tangible, their prices are justified somehow. They also
know that there really aren’t that many great subcontractors to choose
from; and typically, industry standards require us to get bids from three
equally qualified vendors and then use the best price we receive on our
client estimate.
I have found that, more often than not, sharing an hourly rate with
a client will totally freak them out.This is especially true of clients who
need the aforementioned “education” and who are not particularly
accustomed to purchasing design services. Usually, a simple explanation
such as,“Well, this is a big project, and we will have it in our studio for
over three weeks in the research and design stages alone,” will suffice.

133

The Interior Designer’s Guide to P RICING, E STIMATING, and B UDGETING

■

134

(03)9-13 IDG PricingEstimating 3/3/05 3:09 PM Page 134

Clients tend not to envision things going on for several weeks or even
months. I also refer to similar-in-scope projects that I may have shared with
the client from our samples of completed work. It’s helpful when you can
say,“For example, the project we did for company X, which I showed you
a photograph of last week, cost Y dollars to produce,” and so on.
If your client wants a more itemized breakdown of expenses, give it
to him. Sometimes, it is a lot easier to justify project expenses in incremental stages and costs than it is to justify (or even explain) a lump sum.
There can be that tendency to make projects bigger than what a
client might be asking for.The general habit in the industry is to completely tear down and redo! Oh, the fun of it all, the succulent colors,
the glorious textures, the crisp finishes. Even experienced clients who
have been buying high-quality design services for years might need an
education on the many design steps required for particular projects,
especially those projects that have historic architectural standards that
are relevant to updated design requiring more research. I was asked to
work with an architect several years ago on a historic building renovation. I had worked with her before; she is known to be a really tough
businesswoman, but a very good architect who (seemingly) can easily
get zoning redefinitions and permit approvals.When I reviewed my estimate with her she literally went nuts, accusing me of over-inflated
pricing. The fact that I had worked with her before on a low-budget
project didn’t work to my advantage here at all.
This was the architect who had reminded me years ago—after seeing
renovation plans I had personally conceived for a historic building I
myself owned—that I was a great designer but I was no architect. I realized this fact when she asked me where I was going to store my vacuum
cleaner and where the kitty-litter box was going. I ended up hiring her
to revise my plans to include proper storage areas and better organizational space. When I reminded her that she was no designer, while presenting her with an incredible list of justifiable hours needed to complete
the historical research alone, she readily agreed to pay our fees and set up
a meeting for us to get started, much to my relief. I had not worked very
much with this client, and I wanted our professional relationship to grow.
I certainly didn’t want to blow it with a price that seemed out of line to
her. On the other hand, I had researched my pricing carefully and felt my
pricing was extremely fair for the scope of work required.
The important thing here is that I was also unwilling to let her questioning intimidate me into lowering my fees until I had properly
explained them to her. In the long run, she received a beautiful, firstrate presentation, far beyond her original expectations. When I

(03)9-13 IDG PricingEstimating 3/3/05 3:09 PM Page 135

explained that the project seemed more substantial after I got into the
estimating process, I concluded with the fact that, in actuality, she was
getting quite a lot of design for a modest rate. Her agreement gave us
the encouragement to produce some great work without resentment for
what we weren’t being paid. Resentment resulting from lowering your
pricing tends to build, instead of tapering off, once it has begun. It’s not
a desirable way to start a project.

Achieving the Win-Win

N EGOTIATING
■

Frequently, fitting into a client’s budget will oblige you to stand up to
your subcontractors and/or vendors and ask for help.The easiest way to
be in a position to negotiate with a vendor is first and foremost to be
an important client to them.You can achieve this by paying your bills
within the terms noted on your vendor’s invoices, by referring your
vendor to other colleagues and to clients buying their own outside services,
and by sending a letter of thanks to your vendor when his exceptional
services got you out of a jam or his great quality helped you look good
to your client. It is just as important to have good communication with
your vendors as it is with your clients.
Always compare apples to apples when comparing vendors’ and subcontractors’ services. Don’t expect a high-quality professional painter—
with a clean, efficient work crew using the latest spraying equipment, who
shows up on time and on budget, all the time—to be cost-competitive
with Joe Painter, who just started his business with a couple of rollers
and some paint pans. Just as you want your clients to compare you and
your company’s pricing and quality to someone who charges similar
fees for similar quality, your vendors deserve the same treatment.
Ask your vendors and subcontractors to itemize their estimates. If one
pillow manufacturer charges more for down forms than another, you can
at least ask him why if the charges are itemized. Compare similar itemized
quotes from at least two, if not three, similar suppliers.This is an industry
standard, and many of your clients will ask you who you quoted to do
what. Don’t shortchange yourself or your client. Complacent vendors
who realize you’re not taking the time to do comparison-shopping may
begin to take you for granted and not offer you their best pricing.
If you are trying to fit into a client’s budget and you know that it is
very tight, tell your vendors up front where their price needs to be.
Instead of going to the trouble to research your project from the usual
standpoint, they have the option (like you do) of taking the project for
the budgeted amount or turning it down because it doesn’t fit their
fee structure. Estimates take a substantial amount of time to produce

135

The Interior Designer’s Guide to P RICING, E STIMATING, and B UDGETING

■

136

(03)9-13 IDG PricingEstimating 3/3/05 3:09 PM Page 136

properly, as you know. By sharing a tight budget as soon as you are aware
of it, getting the information out on the table for review, you save yourself and your vendors a lot of valuable time and frustration.
It is considered unethical to share a vendor’s name with other vendors involved in the same estimating process. Even if you tend to favor
certain suppliers, for whatever reasons, there may be a time when you
want to expand your vendor list, or maybe a client will ask you to try
to work with a certain vendor, and this will be difficult to achieve
because of your lack of confidentiality. After a job has been awarded to
a certain vendor or subcontractor, you may discuss it with other vendors
as necessary to justify your selection process.
No matter how big or how small your town is, it is very important
to build partnerships with vendors—in much the same way you build
them with clients.Word will travel fast about your work ethics, and these
ethics can (and will) work for or against you.

Here are some of my famous tips for negotiating with vendors:
■

■

Treat your vendors exactly like you want your clients to treat you.
Don’t nickel-and-dime them to death, don’t ask a lot of productionpertinent questions before you make a commitment to using their
services (thus taking up nonbillable time—remember, they need to
make a profit, too), and don’t pass the buck to them if you start
having problems that are really not their fault.
If you do have a problem to resolve, don’t make threats or give ultimatums. If you are absolutely certain that you are right, make sure
that you are negotiating with the right person—probably not the job
foreman, but perhaps the administrative manager or even the owner.
Always have suppliers give you their estimates in writing while
referencing the job number you gave them. Make certain that all
items you specified are on their written estimates. If they forgot to
include something, it is your job to ask them to revise their quote
before you commit a project to them.
Don’t shop for the lowest price when you don’t have to. Remember,
you get what you pay for!
Choose several subcontractors and manufacturers to work with
consistently so that you can build a healthy rapport together. The
stronger your relationships and the longer they last, the easier it will
be to communicate your needs and resolve issues, especially when
you need help saving money for lower-budget jobs.

(03)9-13 IDG PricingEstimating 3/3/05 3:09 PM Page 137

N EGOTIATING
■

The most important attribute of my win-win philosophy is letting
go of your fear of risk. It took me well over ten years of being in business for myself to realize the confidence required to engage my clients
directly, squarely, in face-to-face confrontation. I have learned that confrontation is not a bad word at all; it’s actually very healthy, especially in
long-term relationships. Any of those popular, bestselling self-help
books will validate this theory. I now actually enjoy the risk of potentially giving in to the client’s demands, the risk of possibly losing some
money, the risk of angering—and even perhaps losing—a client.
By embracing these risks, I can readily see the worst-case scenarios
of a problem that lies before me. I am now free to approach a resolution
with complete and total honesty, combined with a genuine willingness
to hear and identify with the client’s point of view. It is important for
me not to drink a lot of caffeine before I enter any sessions that require
me to be smooth and easygoing.This may sound silly but it’s true; know
your own tolerances to caffeine, sleep deprivation, and other stresses and
situations prior to any potentially challenging negotiating meetings.You
want to be fresh and focused solely on the issue at hand, as though it
were the most important moment of your career.
I always like to be proactive by opening a negotiating session first. I
thank clients for their time and endeavor to outline the exact issues on
which we have a disagreement. It is a great idea to present these issues
in writing, in an outlined, bulleted format. This will keep you from
diverting to other issues not pertinent to the subject at hand. Ask your
client to help keep you firmly focused on the list, and announce that
you will do the same for your client. Acknowledge that you want to
leave the room on a high note together, that your goal is win-win. Say
it out loud, with a smile. Smiles work wonders. Relax, have a cookie.
Sweets at the table are a great way to add an informal element to the
event —who doesn’t like a little Toll House in the afternoon? Drink hot
chocolate, not coffee. Be endearing, not abrasive.
The fairest, quickest way to obtain win-win resolution is to split
fifty-fifty any financial differences you are having. Seldom will any reasonable person disagree with this suggestion. If you have followed some
of the ideas previously presented in this book, gotten proper sign-off on
estimates before getting started, properly documented and presented
changes, and gotten the most important sign-off of all—at the end of a
project, prior to construction or manufacturing—your negotiation tasks
will be much easier. Most of us know deep down who’s right and who’s
wrong. It’s simply a matter of listening, confirming, and then creatively,
jointly deciding what’s right.

137

The Interior Designer’s Guide to P RICING, E STIMATING, and B UDGETING

■

138

(03)9-13 IDG PricingEstimating 3/3/05 3:09 PM Page 138

You can validate without agreeing.You can smile and say no.You can
look out the window and wish your mother were there to lighten the
moment.You can listen and learn more about yourself and your business practices.You can ask questions that might help you avoid this situation in the future.The important thing to know in negotiating is that
yes, you can.
Providing win-win solutions is very rewarding and shows your emotional intelligence. It invariably results in huge relief for both parties and
is sometimes cause for celebration over lunch. You buy. It shows your
client that you care about more than simply getting your way, and are
committed to longevity as a business owner.

Rewards and Repeat Clients
I remember sitting at the most beautiful conference table I had ever seen
in my life, early on in my years as a design-firm owner, talking to a prestigious architectural and engineering firm about a liaison relationship.
Awards spilled from its display cases. Photos of international projects
lined the corridors.The building smelled better than a new car, stuffed
ceiling to floor with the coolest office furniture money can design. I
coveted this camaraderie.
The man reviewing our portfolio was engaging and interesting—
and interested.The meeting was going very well. I had founded my firm
just two years earlier and wanted this project, perhaps just a little too
much, as a portfolio showpiece. With the portfolio closed, we sat and
discussed some aptitudes of both of our businesses.The final question he
asked me was, “Why should we enter into this relationship?” My reply
was, “Because we can win awards and recognition for this work.” I got
the first project, and it did win a fair number of rewards and notoriety.
But I will never forget my client’s reply.
He leaned forward in his chair, looked me straight in the eyes, and
said, “Theo, I could care less how many awards or how much press this
project gets you. That doesn’t mean anything to me. If I don’t get this
redesigned space leased within a reasonable timeframe, we will never use
your services again, and I will consider the project a huge failure no
matter how beautiful it is.” I cowered and quivered. At that time, I did
not know the average length of time for leasing a Class A commercial
space in my area. Was he being unreasonable? How much did the success of the design solution actually have to do with leasing the space?
Years later, this same firm is one of our biggest clients. The man who
was my client at that time has gone on to found his own prosperous
architectural firm. He taught me volumes.

(03)9-13 IDG PricingEstimating 3/3/05 3:09 PM Page 139

Now, I always tell my staff that our biggest rewards are repeat clients,
and I truly mean it. Let this be the mantra of our industry, and interior
designers will go from wearing rose-colored glasses to owning the most
profitable businesses of our times. Real, ongoing profitability relies on
continuity, cohesiveness, and reliability. Clients who know that your
rates are perhaps higher than Bob’s down the street won’t mind paying
more if they know that, beyond your originality, you are going to provide fair and honest delivery of more than just interior design with
good environmental functionality.
Your role as an industry expert is to rise above the typical flash-inthe-pan trends.You can present the differences by being a savvy negotiator. Learn to enjoy the entire negotiating process, and it will be
evident to your peers. Rising above will result in your ability to be
somewhat intimidating—but in a good way—at the tables of future sessions. Clients will learn to trust what you say and not question your
authority over and over into infinity.

N EGOTIATING
■

139

The Interior Designer’s Guide to P RICING, E STIMATING, and B UDGETING

■

140

(03)9-13 IDG PricingEstimating 3/3/05 3:09 PM Page 140

Case Study Interview
Negotiating—A Story That Ends Win-Win: Kimberly France,
House of France, Montgomery, Ohio

Kimberly France is a graduate of the Peddie School and has a bachelor of science degree from Bucknell University. In 1994, when she and
her family were moving from New Jersey to North Carolina, a train
struck her moving van and all of her family’s possessions were
destroyed. As a young mother, she took it upon herself to rebuild the
household and took full advantage of her proximity to High Point,
North Carolina, the furniture/accessory capital of the world. Her
research and study of the furniture industry paid off when friends and
neighbors began hiring her to decorate their homes as well. In 1999,
Kimberly joined Design Works Studio in Raleigh, North Carolina, a
full-service interior design house. During her time with Design
Works, she was hired to design a multimillion-dollar model home,
several Dream Home Showcases, a cosmetic dentistry office, as well as
many residential design projects. In 2002, Kimberly moved to
Cincinnati, Ohio, where she and her husband opened a furnishings
and interior design boutique aptly named House of France. They
employ four full-time designers, a project manager, an office manager,
and an intern. She and her husband reside in Indian Hill, Ohio, with
their seven children.

Q. How do you present your fees and policies with new customers?
A. We have a unique situation in that we are a furnishings and interior
design boutique—our team works within our store meeting customers
all day long, so we have an ability to discuss our fees with potential
clients face to face.We also publish an interior design pamphlet that the
customers can take with them and outline three different ways we price
projects. Many times customers—especially younger couples in a firsthome situation—are reluctant to ask questions about fees, so our
brochure works wonderfully for them.
We have two levels of designers. Senior designers bill out at $100
an hour, and junior designers bill out at $75 an hour, and this is the
first fee policy we have: straight hourly rates.The second fee structure
we have is that for every $2,000 in furniture and/or accessories purchased we erase an hour from the customer’s bill. We are extremely
lenient with this billing program as we try to develop a working relationship with our clients. A cohesive, finished look is our goal, and

(03)9-13 IDG PricingEstimating 3/3/05 3:09 PM Page 141

N EGOTIATING
■

the more items we sell from our showroom the more profitability we
can share with our staff and the customer with regard to hourly
design consultation.
The third pricing structure—which is decidedly the best win-win
for our staff designers—is an incentive fee program.This works by motivating the designers working the showroom floor to sell the customer
on a design contract. In this fee structure, they develop a budget
together and 10 percent of the entire budget is paid to our business,
which is nonrefundable but which of course counts toward all purchases.Then the designers go off of their internal hourly salary (which
is minimal, plus only 3 percent of customer purchases) and begin to do
a lot of non-revenue-generating work—floor plans, selecting wall coverings, furnishings, etc.They make all of their purchase orders through our
store and set the pricing themselves.The designers are in complete control driving the project—free to set pricing, do whatever it takes.These
are the only things that get deducted from the total amount of purchases. So once the contract is signed, we have very little invested in the
actual overhead of the employee; and the designer has the freedom to
design [read: sell!] as much as she can for a much more generous cut of
the profits. Our office manager even handles the numbers for the project
manager/designer.
Most retail outlets in Cincinnati don’t pay designers hourly; everything is commission-based in our area. I want the opportunity to hire
young hungry designers. My profit-sharing program gives them a sense
of independence. If they want to reduce the price of something for a
customer that is buying a lot—if someone spends $100,000 for
example—they can drive it.This method really teaches them to become
businesspeople, project managers, and full-service designers, all at a
much larger salary than they would typically make anywhere else
starting out.
The only time this has not worked was very recently when a
brand-new designer reeled in a 27,000-square-foot house project.
This is the largest home ever to be sold in Cincinnati and it is owned
by a very big name in town.There was no way she could handle this
project alone, so the hourly salary plus 3-percent customer purchase
commission is a huge blessing to her, and it will certainly pay off
with the best experience and education she could dream of in this
stage of her career. She has already flown to New York in a private
jet to buy rugs.

141

The Interior Designer’s Guide to P RICING, E STIMATING, and B UDGETING

■

142

(03)9-13 IDG PricingEstimating 3/3/05 3:09 PM Page 142

Q. How do you show clients that you are worth the fees you charge?
A. We quote verbally and the pamphlet really works great. Plus, since
our designers often create the contract situation I described earlier, they
develop a more intimate relationship with our clients and it becomes
easier to present the information.

Q. Have you ever had someone challenge your fee structure, and if so,
what was the outcome?

A. Yes, I have had them say things such as, “Well, if I’m buying furniture through you, why do I have to pay extra for design services?” Or,
“No one else makes me pay for design service.” My reply is that we have
to make sure that the designers get paid for their time and usually, with
the generosity of our complimentary hourly design service at certain
purchase levels, our clients are sophisticated enough to understand that
our people would not get paid if we didn’t structure fees for services
over and above what we initially offer to them.

Q. Will you share with us an occurrence where you had to do some
negotiating with a client, vendor, or subcontractor? What transpired for
you and how did you resolve it?
A. The most interesting one is just now occurring, with the 27,000square-foot home I mentioned earlier. A couple owns the home—
she’s a federal court judge and he is a big-name class-action lawyer. I
didn’t know him and he didn’t know of us, particularly; they just came
into the store and he met one of my junior designers and told her he
wanted one designer to do his entire project. He was adamant about
not paying full retail from the showroom and negotiated with me,
challenging me to come up with a pricing structure for him if he
bought $100,000, $200,000, or $300,000 worth of items. I spent several crazy days and sleepless nights, realizing the scope of the project of
this size, yet not wanting to sink my entire business into this one
client. I wondered how taxing this was going to be on the support
staff, even with the junior designer assisting; it is a big, big load on
everyone—on top of the other projects we have. I finally came up
with a sliding scale based on a per-item purchase. On items up to
$3,000 (and he sees all my invoices), I use a 1.6-percent markup. Items
between $3,000 and $10,000 take the markup down to 1.2 percent. I
knew he was going to have expensive taste; for example, a $50,000
desk instead of a $5,000 desk is the same amount of work for my staff
to resource. So I think I am still making a fair amount of money, and
so far things are going very well.

(03)9-13 IDG PricingEstimating 3/3/05 3:09 PM Page 143

Positioning Your Firm

e’re all in the business of creating design solutions for
spaces—that’s a given. But we’ve come to an age of sophistication in our society when I believe it’s time for interior
designers to step up and be gratefully acknowledged. Never
before has environmental design been so prominent in our
everyday activities. People rely on good interior design without
even knowing it, as it relates to their physiological comfort with
regard to ergonomics and good lighting, and to their emotional
energy, as demonstrated by feng shui. The significance of what
you do is at the very center of many people’s daily lives, both
personally and professionally.

Standing on a Soapbox
Make it a point to take nothing for granted.You have known all
along the values that permeate our world because of effective
interior design. I have advised my staff since day one not to
create a firm style, but rather to create a multitude, an endless
array of styles that are relative to each client’s needs.The result is
what we market as “the smart firm.”
It became apparent to me several years ago that big interior
design firms were losing market share to boutique firms like my
own. Articles were written in national news magazines and
newspapers around the country profiling new, smaller, maverick
firms that were obtaining big-name, international clients. I
wanted a piece of that action for my firm too. I love to travel,
and as I traveled more—even within the United States—I began
to see prominent subcultures in attitude and lifestyle emerging
that differed not only from coast to coast but also from city to
city within the same state. This fascinated me and continues to
do so today. My firm does not only reside in my hometown. I
feel it resides around the world. After all, we do work for clients
who have offices, collectively, on all continents, so we needed to

The Interior Designer’s Guide to P RICING, E STIMATING, and B UDGETING

■

144

(03)9-13 IDG PricingEstimating 3/3/05 3:09 PM Page 144

adapt our own mentality and raise the bar on how we look at projects
both from an aesthetic perspective and, more importantly, from a content perspective.

Playing It Smart
The “smart firm” concept evolved in synchronicity with our hiring a
sales-development person who is well known in our region—a onetime television personality who transcended her own career as weatherperson to become a strategic marketer and planner. Hiring this person
taught me that we would never again go without someone with her talents and perceptions. Our large clients who have in-house strategic
marketing can now appreciate the fact that we are creating more than
“pretty spaces.” Even though we pride ourselves in appropriately
researching projects before we start designing, the residual benefit of
having a full-time strategic marketing person on staff elevated us in our
larger clients’ minds by a generous proportion. Our smaller clients benefit from her endeavors because each of our design solutions is presented
with strategic reasoning. Suddenly, fewer questions are asked about why
we chose orange or why we used photographs on the wall instead of
paintings. It’s all in the research!
Having a strategic marketing person on staff also made me realize
that we had no actual marketing plan for our firm. Here we were, fifteen years old, with no plan other than to try to be as progressive as possible, react to ever-increasing changes within our industry, and enjoy
ourselves along the way. Our process within this new (to us) realm was
still in its infancy, but some interesting issues soon developed. First and
foremost, the hiring of this person was so effective, we needed to hire
an assistant for her, only one year after her hiring. Things we see our
clients do—press releases, attending community events, and getting
more involved in regional business endeavors—get our name into the
public domain quickly and effectively, which results in our phones
ringing more with requests for projects.
One of the first things I asked our strategic marketing planner to do
was to begin thinking of a structure with which we could present our
firm on paper. Her first action was to write a business review for my critique. Within that review, she identified our mission as a design firm
with regard to our history, our future responsibilities, and professional
ethics. She identified a myriad of services we provided, while ranking
the types of clients we had attracted by overall sales revenues.
Next, she outlined attributes of the firm relative to our current size
and comparatively with other similarly sized firms around the country.

(03)9-13 IDG PricingEstimating 3/3/05 3:09 PM Page 145

P OSITIONING YOUR F IRM
■

She then did some informal research to check how our own new
“brand definition” stood up—were people familiar with our company?
Did our location help, hinder, or matter? How did our deliverables stand
up to what was being done in the industry? What types of brand loyalties did our customers have, if any?
She then provided me with a chart detailing the “sales by user
group” for the last three years.This chart showed me trends that I had
not realized were evident within our revenue paradigm. From this
information, we derived segmentation information, showing a percentage of revenues coming from repeat business, extension business
(cross-selling additional services with existing or recent clients), private
label business (revenues coming from intermediaries or recommendations from existing clients), and new business derived from cold-calling
efforts or networking.
This information gave us a very clear picture of who we were at one
time and of who we are today, and it set the groundwork for questioning who we want to be tomorrow. Some strategies were devised to
increase awareness among our potential customer base. Our annual holiday gift giving was revamped to include content material featuring our
latest creative achievements. “Due diligence before design” has become
our motto.
The result is a more energized firm. About a year after hiring our
strategic marketing planner, our most creative (at that time) senior
director left for an equity position at a competitor firm. It could have
been a blow to our staff, and I believe it was, temporarily.We decided to
empower some of the younger people who had been loyal employees
to the firm, embracing their enthusiasm for design and complimenting
them for their acceptance of this higher system of knowledge application. Now, this “new and improved” group—having its foundation in
being the same core of people—has literally reinvented itself with regard
to self-esteem, presentation to the outside world, and professional culture. Sure, they still have rubber-band fights and silly grilling contests on
the George Foreman Grill. But they also have instituted things like creative brainstorming retreats for the purpose of creating promotion for
the firm itself. Encouraging everyone to take personal pride and ownership of the smart-firm concept has proven successful in morale, productivity, and creativity.
A personal selling strategy for the firm was then created and detailed
with regard to presentation styles, proposal content, our Web site, and
various other revenue-enhancing operations, with an overall effort to
reduce selling costs while increasing selling content.

145

The Interior Designer’s Guide to P RICING, E STIMATING, and B UDGETING

■

146

(03)9-13 IDG PricingEstimating 3/3/05 3:09 PM Page 146

Getting Out in the Press
Generating publicity for your firm through the media, both regional
and national, is integral to business growth. Brainstorming ideas for
newsworthy press releases relative to your firm’s success stories and
capabilities should be done at least quarterly. If you do not have a marketing person, your office manager can source distribution channels for
articles written by you as the principal “expert.” A public relations or
marketing consultant might also be retained for resourcefulness (and
article writing).There should be a constant effort to step up the quality
of design competitions you enter, with a special focus on national possibilities. One goal you might consider is creating a foundation for interior design students, with the goal of awarding an annual scholarship in
your firm’s name. Creating your own nonprofit entity can be an excellent way to permeate your community with goodwill, resulting in some
new interest.
Strategic marketing makes a lot of sense for you at this stage in your
game. I’m only sorry that I didn’t recognize its value from day one. It
has put us into a much more proactive position to think ahead, dream,
and evolve from a plan instead of only reacting to economic and
internal situations. I do honestly look at my business as a big, funky chess
game, if you will.The moves must be well thought out, creativity reigns
in the end, and it doesn’t happen all that quickly.
The ongoing growth of our firm requires us to review our plan
annually, with adjustments made continually. Just having a plan at all is
a step in the right direction to committing to your firm’s development.
Our industry is especially chained to the concept of change and flexibility. Grasping for answers in a world economy that requires us to react
quickly or get lost in someone else’s feather duster is a lost cause. Having
a vision for possibilities and a plan to build the roads to the foreseeable
plain puts you up on the flight deck.

Communicating Successfully
We take communications for granted, with e-mail, cell phones, pagers,
voicemail, and who knows what’s next? Effective communication in
our industry lies in three very different arenas, which we usually rank
this way: communicating with our clients, communicating with our
support network (i.e., bankers and suppliers), and, usually last by
default, communicating with our employees and ourselves. I encourage
everyone in the industry to reverse the order of his or her communications priorities.

(03)9-13 IDG PricingEstimating 3/3/05 3:09 PM Page 147

P OSITIONING YOUR F IRM
■

First, our employees are our biggest assets. And if you’re a oneperson shop, then you’re indisputably your biggest super-plus. Show
your understanding of this value every day, and never take it anything
else but seriously. By understanding your process, you can go to the next
level, which is that of being good to yourself and your staff. If you know
you’re a perfectionist, take a day off work every time you complete a big
job. If you know you’re a procrastinator, set up an incentive for yourself
to take a day off if you get the job finished by noon on Tuesday.A happy
you is a happy staff, and vice versa.
One of the most difficult things about growing my firm was hiring
the first employee. She was incredibly talented, and I was very lucky.
This was not her first job out of college, so I was even luckier. Still,
though, she required maintenance. And soon after, there was another
employee, then another. Suddenly, I became a human resources manager. Design classes never prepared me for this at all. I had to rely on my
instincts and my own personal motivations.
Many days went by when my own billable design time went down
the drain. I seldom closed my door and always encouraged staff to come
and talk to me. I still do. Now, if I really need or want to get something
done, I just don’t go into the office! Really—communicating with creative people is something I enjoy and am motivated to do, because
through listening to them—and listening in turn to my own
responses—I always learn something about myself and about managing
a design firm.
The biggest challenge in communicating successfully with creatives
is to listen, and listen as long as it takes. I typically find that designers are
their worst critics.They are very hard on themselves and have a difficult
time communicating. From a personality profile at my firm, most of us
are introverts. Introverts find it hard to be open with information.You
have to ask them questions. I always try to put myself in their position
and then tell them a story about myself—or another person with whom
I’ve had experience working—and make an attempt to adapt my story
to their situation. By doing this, I do not put them on the defensive,
which is the very last place you want them to go.
I tell analogous stories so that they can then visualize themselves in
the scenario of the narrative. Creatives have a wonderful sense of intuition and relational thinking. The stories help them by showing them
what I did, or what the person in my story said, without telling them
what I think they should do. I always say,“My experience with this type
of situation is . . .” before moving into the analogy. Without fail, the
response is a solution coming from them, not me. Role-playing might

147

The Interior Designer’s Guide to P RICING, E STIMATING, and B UDGETING

■

148

(03)9-13 IDG PricingEstimating 3/3/05 3:09 PM Page 148

ensue between us, where we have a lively discussion about possible
scenarios. It becomes fun, and a once-serious situation suddenly has
gone from a square box to an open continuum.
Having you and your staff in synchronicity is like changing the oil
in your automobile on a regular basis. We look forward to annual staff
retreats, using a Myers-Briggs–trained facilitator to discuss our personality preferences and how those preferences make us communicate the
way we do. This helps us all to have a greater understanding of each
other. Introverts can appear cold and unapproachable when, in actuality,
they need to feel safe before they can have open discussions. Extroverts
might seem obnoxious and arrogant, when they are simply thinking out
loud and need validation and feedback.
Using and understanding Myers-Briggs personality types helps us to
better understand and communicate with our vendors and clients. Years
of studying and comparing personality preferences among our staff have
trained us to readily observe preferences in communication styles of
other people whom we see often. It’s enjoyable to realize that we all are
who we are because of things we simply prefer rather than because of a
superficial compulsion to torture our colleagues! To anyone who wants
to be a better communicator, I highly recommend attending a MyersBriggs workshop or reading books from the organization. The organization’s long history and available case studies far outweigh other trendy
self-help concepts. Visit the official site (www.myersbriggs.org) for more
information. Also visit www.typelogic.com, another good Web site.
Our support network of vendors, from bankers to builders, is too
often ignored with regard to how we treat them.Vendors are almost as
important (and sometimes even more important) than our staff. They
can make or break you in more ways than one. Doing something nice
for these folks every once in a while is one of the smartest things you
can do. Most of the time, these people are hearing about problems with
a project, frustration with accounts payable or accounts receivable, carryover complaints from your clients, and so on. Treat them to some
good news for a change! Send them a letter of thanks when things go
well. Don’t forget them during the holidays. Talk to them with the
highest respect.
Think of your vendors as your counselors. They give advice on a
plethora of subjects.You need them.You need to delegate complex and
often personal situations to them.We make great client presentations in
our sleep; why not make a great visual presentation to our bankers when
we’re asking for a bigger line of credit? Just as designers love colors and
patterns, bankers love financial information. Designing creative charts

(03)9-13 IDG PricingEstimating 3/3/05 3:09 PM Page 149

supporting your request will work wonders and sometimes even get you
a banker for a client. Put your professional skills to work when you need
to prove a point. Show your favorite contractor how much business
you’ve given him over the last year when you’re asking for some help
on numbers. Design him a personal thank-you card relative to the presented information.
Good client rapport begins with a simple yet seldom-thought-of
action. I always ask new clients how I should stay in contact with them.
Phone? Voicemail? E-mail? Photos of project examples and case scenarios on occasion? Monthly meetings? Then, I make a note of their
reply and follow their suggestions. Funny, I have a client who always
wants me to fax her, yet she always complains that she never receives the
faxes. So, whenever we fax her, our office manager voicemails and emails her to tell her she needs to look for her fax. Outdated, yes, but this
is what the client asks for, so we steadfastly adhere to her request.

Here are some other pertinent client-communication tips:
■

■

P OSITIONING YOUR F IRM

■

For ongoing clients, e-mail or fax (ask for their preference) them a
weekly status report.
Make quarterly meetings with existing and potential clients to show
them your most recent work. It’s so easy to forget your existing client
list relative to your latest and greatest.
Don’t be reluctant to toot your own horn. Many younger people in
our business tend to shy away from talking about their successes
and think by simply showing their work, it should speak for itself.
Not true. Learning how to talk about your work in relation to
qualitative and quantitative performance is quite necessary in
obtaining clients at the next level.
Realize that your client has a life. Respect it. Don’t call clients on
Mondays if you can help it. Mondays are hectic, do-everything-youdidn’t-get-done-on-Friday kinds of days. Don’t call them between
11:45 A.M. and 2 P.M. unless you have a lunch appointment together.
Don’t call them after 4:45 P.M., when they’re trying to wrap up their
day. The best time to make calls is between 9 and 11 A.M.
If you have bad news, try to hold it until Friday afternoon. Fridays
are usually happy days, and then you both have the weekend to
think about problem solving.

■

149

The Interior Designer’s Guide to P RICING, E STIMATING, and B UDGETING

■

150

(03)9-13 IDG PricingEstimating 3/3/05 3:09 PM Page 150

Learning Some Hard Lessons
I have had the misfortune to be the whipping post for lots of clients
throughout my years as a business owner. It’s so strange to have a psychotic client who loves you one minute and then berates you the next
with unreasonable ultimatums, sarcasm, demands, and tones of voice that
could curdle blue cheese. I hate to admit that, in my firm’s case, most of
these attitudes come from middle managers. When I am confronted
with this type of client, I try to listen to the wrath and remove myself
from them as soon as possible.
There is absolutely no way to win a conversation with someone
who is in this frame of mind. She wants to beat you up because it makes
her feel superior and strong. After the bullying, and after a safe amount
of time has passed, hopefully after a remedy to whatever caused the
stress, I try to schedule some offsite time with her. This meeting is the
foundation for whether or not this client has longevity with me. Life is
too sweet to surround oneself with unhappiness. I am quick to validate
these clients’ anger and be sorry they were angry. Remember, I can validate without agreeing whether or not it was right. But then, I must
have a compassionate, direct conversation with them about their communication style.You get what you want by being nice, simple as that.
You can demand with gentle firmness. It is an art, but it can be accomplished through practice.

Getting Down to Basics
A review of somewhat generic communication tips follows, with specific
correlations to the interior design profession. I like to share these subjects
openly at lectures I am asked to give in our industry and open the floor
for case studies and feedback.Think of your own experiences at the end
of every week, and, if you are of the mindset, start an informal journal of
communication occurrences, good and bad. This will help you to start
your own log of stories for future discussions with employees.
The basics begin with what I call the handshake versus the
Hollywood hug. I come from the Midwest, where people are basically
conservative—it’s cold in the wintertime and hugs are for family.When
I arrived in Hollywood, I was surprised to find that a lot of my clients
actually hug or do the chic cheek thing—men and women alike!
When I speak to an audience, large or small, I like to introduce
myself and explain my lecture by walking around the room (with a
microphone), shaking as many people’s hands as I can.Then, I introduce
the concept of first impressions.Whether your subculture shakes hands
(it’s always the safest way to get started) or hugs (these usually come

(03)9-13 IDG PricingEstimating 3/3/05 3:09 PM Page 151

Some Ideas for Improvement

■

Learn to role-play as a means for better communication. If you have a
client who constantly befuddles you, practice the possible conversational

P OSITIONING YOUR F IRM

after the first job or two), it’s important to do so with warmth and sincerity.Too many men loosely shake women’s hands like fragile noodles.
They need to learn to sincerely shake with firm (yet not bone-splitting) simplicity. On the other hand, too many ladies want to make a
statement that they’re strong and have their guns loaded, and they shake
too hard. Learning to shake hands well might sound extremely elementary, but try it objectively within your circle of close friends. Ask
for honest critiques, and get it all out in the open. Everyone might
learn something surprising.
Nonverbal communication says volumes. Posture, eye contact, vocal
cues, personal space allowance, and your appearance tell the world about
who you are, where you’ve been, and where you’re going to go.Think
of celebrities within our American culture and even your regional political figures, and you’ll see what I mean.There’s definitely something we
say with our body language. For example, sitting at a conference table
with your arms folded tightly across your chest in a negotiating session
is likely to get you out the door a failure.
Learn to exert your professional influence without being overpowering. In most cases, in-person, face-to-face communication is best for
clarifying, explaining, and resolving issues, uncertainties, or any misunderstandings. Environment and context can also influence the success of your
dominance. Choose a light, airy location for your important conferences.
Be on time. Showing up late gives an appearance of arrogance and of letting something else that is more important take precedence. Even if this is
truly the case, you don’t want the person waiting to have this impression.
E-mailing can be a very good and, just as quickly, a very bad means
of communicating effectively. I suggest using e-mail for information
delivery only. I also make it a point to request a return receipt on all
dated, important messages. Cyberspace has its delivery glitches. If you’re
going to use e-mail, commit to using it proficiently.This means you or
your secretary will need to follow up on your sent messages and make
sure that you received replies to time-sensitive material. Never share
emotions or concerns via e-mail. Too often, our personalities cause us
to write either too much or too little, too bluntly or too enticingly.
Having others reading between our lines can really get us into lots of
trouble, especially when what they’re reading is not what we intended.
Better to play it safe and stick to the facts where e-mail is concerned.

151

The Interior Designer’s Guide to P RICING, E STIMATING, and B UDGETING

■

152

(03)9-13 IDG PricingEstimating 3/3/05 3:09 PM Page 152

scenarios that might arise. I like to do this in the car with a minirecorder. It’s fun to talk into a voice-activated box and pretend you’re
having a conversation with the other guy; all while you’re cruising to
your next appointment or picking up dinner at the drive-through. It’s
even more fun to listen to the “conversation” later. Go ahead and amuse
yourself.You’re an imaginative person; that’s why you’re in this business.
You will get better at guessing what your client is going to say the more
you play this game. Just think, you’re always the winner in this one!
Politics play a huge role in how well we communicate with our
clients. I’m not talking about your registered voting party; I’m talking
about intra-personal issues within your clients’ companies. Be a listener.
Remember, you can validate someone without agreeing with him or
her. Don’t get involved with who said what or who did what on that
weekend, last month, or next year. Keep your knowledge of so-called
political agendas within your clients’ domain to yourself.This is the safest
way to maintain professional integrity and client loyalty to your firm.
I have a “me versus we” theory that reminds my staff and me that, by
signing a contract with a client, we are agreeing to collaborate.We are
now a team. It is our challenge, therefore, to deem ourselves collectivist
versus individualist without selling our souls. Questioning and
answering what we want and what we can give in return helps to
establish priorities at the onset of a new project even when a relationship has been well identified with a client. New projects mean new
ways of thinking and exploring our flexibility. This is not always easy,
and we need to remind ourselves of our commitment to collaboration.

Why You Charge What You Do
We charge what we do as interior designers because we are experts.
Being experts requires us to look at ourselves as much more than artists
of visual communications.We are ultimately experts at communication
of all varieties, at all levels. Making excuses for our pricing structure will
only undermine our own authority. Being proficient in communication
can come naturally to us when we embrace these concepts, resulting in
better self-confidence and stability.
The roles that you play as initiator, contributor, information seeker,
opinion maker, information giver, elaborator, coordinator, orienter,
mediator, evaluator, energizer, technician, lawyer, accountant, motivator, harmonizer, compromiser, and expediter all tie into the ultimate
reasons for writing this book. Pricing, estimating, and budgeting in our
industry have their place in Maslow’s hierarchy of needs theory. Selfactualization, followed by esteem, belongingness, safety, and psychological aptitude, all tie into our ability to communicate well, and ultimately
to our profitability.

(04)Appendix IDG Pricing 3/3/05 3:21 PM Page 153

Appendix: Business Forms

he use of business forms is crucial for the smooth running of
any business. The forms gathered in this appendix are
intended to help in implementing the business steps and strategies discussed in this book. No form can fit all situations, but
they can at least offer a starting point for the creation of customized forms that will best suit your company’s needs.
■

■

The Estimating Worksheet is designed to allow you to understand all the costs you are likely to incur, so you can prepare
an accurate estimate to give to your client.
The Estimate/Confirmation of Assignment serves both to
present your estimate to the client and, if the job goes
forward, as the contract for the project.
The Project Mission Statement is used internally to clarify how
the design team will act individually and together to meet
the defined goals of the project.
The Weekly Time Sheet allows the tracking of time spent on
the project, which can then be related back to the
Estimating Worksheet to see if the project is on target.
The Project Expense Ledger details all expenditures for the
project and can also be reviewed against the Estimating
Worksheet.
The Change-Order Form makes certain that the client has
approved and will pay for any changes.
The Invoice is used to bill the client and incorporates by
reference the terms of the Estimate/Confirmation of
Assignment.

The best resource for the designer to develop business forms is
Business and Legal Forms for Interior Designers by Tad Crawford and Eva
Doman Bruck. It offers a wide variety of forms, an in-depth discussion of and negotiation checklist for each form, and includes a
CD-ROM with the forms for ease of customization.Another excellent resource is the Graphic Artists Guild’s Pricing and Ethical Guidelines.
This appendix and the forms contained herein have been
created for this book by Tad Crawford (© Tad Crawford 2001)
and are published here with his permission.

The Interior Designer’s Guide to P RICING, E STIMATING, and B UDGETING

■

154

(04)Appendix IDG Pricing 3/3/05 3:21 PM Page 154

Project Plan and Budget
CLIENT

■

Name ——————————————————————————————————————————————
Address (Meetings) —————————————————————————————————————————

■
■

Phone ——————————————————————————————————————————————
Address (Billing) ——————————————————————————————————————————
Phone ——————————————————————————————————————————————

Cell

——————————————————————————————————————————————

Fax ———————————————————————————————————————————————
Other Contact Information ——————————————————————————————————————

ESTIMATING FORMAT

ASSUMPTION: RATES ARE PER

■

HOUR

■

DAY

■

WEEK
LABOR
Lead
Designer

Principal
RATES
Program Development
Client Intake Meetings
Site Conditions: Measurements and Notes
Research
Schematics
Preliminary Color/Materials (“Mood”) Boards
Preliminary Budget/Schedule Estimates
Program Presentation
Revisions
Miscellaneous
Subtotal
Design Development—Phase One—Schematics
Site Plan Base Drawings
Traffic Patterns
Space/Layout Plans
Schematic Plans and Preliminary Selections
Walls
Floors
Ceilings
Window Treatments
Millwork
Fixtures and Hardware
Furniture
Audio/Video
Spa/Exercise Furnishings
Linens, Rugs, Decorative Items
Presentation/Sample Boards
Budget/Schedule Estimates
Schematics Presentation
Revisions
Miscellaneous
Subtotal

Design
Assistant

Designer
$

Total
Labor

(04)Appendix IDG Pricing 3/3/05 3:21 PM Page 155

■

Estimate Form for Client

■

Preliminary Budget and Schedule

■

Budget and Schedule Status Review

Date —————————————————————
By —————————————————————

PROJECT
Job Number

———————————————————————————————————————————
Job Name ————————————————————————————————————————————
Location —————————————————————————————————————————————
Description ————————————————————————————————————————————

ESTIMATE FACTORS
Design
Assistant

Total
Labor

Materials

COST
Misc.

Budget

To-Date

SCHEDULE
Balance

Allocated

To-Date

Balance

A PPENDIX : B USINESS F ORMS
■

155

The Interior Designer’s Guide to P RICING, E STIMATING, and B UDGETING

■

156

(04)Appendix IDG Pricing 3/3/05 3:21 PM Page 156

ESTIMATING FORMAT

ASSUMPTION: RATES ARE PER

■

HOUR

■

DAY

■

WEEK
LABOR
Lead
Designer

Principal
RATES
Design Development—Phase Two—Final
Final Site Plan Base Drawings
Final Traffic Patterns
Final Space/Layout Plans
Final Plans and Selections
Walls
Floors
Ceilings
Window Treatments
Millwork
Fixtures and Hardware
Furniture
Audio/Video
Spa/Exercise Furnishings
Linens, Rugs, Decorative Items
Final Presentation/Sample Boards
Final Budget/Schedule
Final Design Development Presentation
Revisions
Miscellaneous
Subtotal
Contract Documents and Bids
Bid Drawings and Specs
Bid Review
Client Review of Bids
Revisions
Vendor Selection and Contracts
Miscellaneous
Subtotal
Project Implementation
Purchasing—Stock Items
Wall Fabrics/Finishes
Flooring Material
Ceiling Materials
Window Treatments
Fixtures and Hardware
Furniture
Audio/Video
Spa/Exercise Furnishings
Linens, Rugs, Decorative Items
Storage/Shipping/Handling
Miscellaneous
Subtotal

Design
Assistant

Designer
$

Total
Labor

(04)Appendix IDG Pricing 3/3/05 3:21 PM Page 157

ESTIMATE FACTORS
Design
Assistant

Total
Labor

Materials

COST
Misc.

Budget

To-Date

SCHEDULE
Balance

Allocated

To-Date

Balance

A PPENDIX : B USINESS F ORMS
■

157

The Interior Designer’s Guide to P RICING, E STIMATING, and B UDGETING

■

158

(04)Appendix IDG Pricing 3/3/05 3:21 PM Page 158

ESTIMATING FORMAT

ASSUMPTION: RATES ARE PER

■

HOUR

■

DAY

■

WEEK
LABOR
Lead
Designer

Principal
RATES
Fabrication—Custom Orders
Wall Fabrics/Finishes
Flooring Material
Ceiling Materials
Window Treatments
Millwork
Fixtures and Hardware
Furniture
Audio/Video/Security/Other Electronic
Linens, Rugs, Decorative Items
Storage/Shipping/Handling
Miscellaneous
Subtotal
Construction—Site Supervision
Scheduling
Walls
Floors
Ceilings
Miscellaneous
Subtotal
Installation—Site Supervision
Wall Painting/Coverings
Floor Treatments
Ceiling Treatments
Window Treatments
Millwork
Fixtures and Hardware
Furniture
Audio/Video/Security/Other Electronic
Spa/Exercise Furnishings
Linens, Rugs, Decorative Items
Miscellaneous
Subtotal
Final Project Completion Items
Walk Through and Punch List
Supervision of Punch List Completion
Miscellaneous
Subtotal

Project Total

Design
Assistant

Designer
$

Total
Labor

(04)Appendix IDG Pricing 3/3/05 3:21 PM Page 159

ESTIMATE FACTORS
Design
Assistant

Total
Labor

Materials

COST
Misc.

Budget

To-Date

SCHEDULE
Balance

Allocated

To-Date

Balance

A PPENDIX : B USINESS F ORMS
■

159

The Interior Designer’s Guide to P RICING, E STIMATING, and B UDGETING

■

160

(04)Appendix IDG Pricing 3/3/05 3:21 PM Page 160

SUMMARY FORMAT

ASSUMPTION: FOR SCHEDULING, TIME SHOWN IS IN
Program
Development

Project Details
Walls/Ceilings
Paint
Wall Coverings
Mouldings
Other
Floors/Stairways
Wood
Ceramic
Stone
Carpeting
Mouldings
Other
Window Treatments
Shades/Blinds
Louvers
Drapery
Valances
Other
Millwork
Fixtures and Hardware
Bath
Kitchen
Lighting
Wall/Door
Other
Furniture
Furniture—Purchase
Furniture—Commission
Furniture—Recondition/Special Finish
Furniture—(Re)upholstery
Audio/Video/Security/Other Electronic
Spa/Exercise Furnishings
Other Furnishings
Linens
Rugs
Decorative Items (Objets d’art)
Miscellaneous
Travel
Messengers
Insurance
Storage
Shipping and Handling
Project Total

■

HOURS

■

DAYS

DD/1—
Schematics

■

WEEKS
DD/2—
Final

Contract Documents
and Bids

Purchasin
Stock Item

Contract Documents
and Bids

(04)Appendix IDG Pricing 3/3/05 3:21 PM Page 161

Purchasing
Stock Items

Fabrication
Custom Orders

Construction
Site Supervision

Installation
Site Supervision

Final
Project Completion

Total

A PPENDIX : B USINESS F ORMS
■

161

The Interior Designer’s Guide to P RICING, E STIMATING, and B UDGETING

■

162

(04)Appendix IDG Pricing 3/3/05 3:21 PM Page 162

Proposal Form
Date ———————————————————
By ———————————————————
CLIENT INFORMATION
Name ———————————————————————————————————————
Address (Meetings) —————————————————————————————————
Phone ——————————————————————————————————————
Address (Billing) ——————————————————————————————————
Phone ——————————————————————————————————————
Cell ———————————————————————————————————————
Fax ———————————————————————————————————————
Other Contact Information ———————————————————————————————
PROJECT
Name

——————————————————————————————————————

Location —————————————————————————————————————
FEE INFORMATION
Flat Fee ——————————————————————————————————————
Percentage (Square Feet) (Price of Goods) —————————————————————————
Hourly Rates ————————————————————————————————————
SCOPE OF WORK

WORK PLAN SCHEDULE
START-END DATES
Program Development
Design Development—Phase One—Schematics
Design Development—Phase Two—Final
Contract Documents and Bids
Project Implementation
Construction—Site Supervision
Installation—Site Supervision
Final Project Completion Items

BUDGET

TOTAL TIME

(04)Appendix IDG Pricing 3/3/05 3:21 PM Page 163

WORK PLAN—DETAIL
NOTES

BUDGET

TOTAL TIME

Walls/Ceilings
Painting
Painting—Special
Wall Coverings
Mouldings
Other
Floors/Stairways
Wood
Ceramic
Stone
Carpeting
Mouldings
Other
Window Treatments
Shades/Blinds
Louvers
Drapery
Valances
Other
Millwork
Fixtures and Hardware
Bath
Kitchen
Lighting
Wall/Door
Other
Furniture
Furniture—Purchase
Furniture—Commission
Furniture—Recondition/Special Finish

Spa/Exercise Furnishings
Other Furnishings
Linens
Rugs
Decorative Items

A PPENDIX : B USINESS F ORMS

Furniture—(Re)upholstery
Audio/Video/Security/Other Electronic

■

163

The Interior Designer’s Guide to P RICING, E STIMATING, and B UDGETING

■

164

(04)Appendix IDG Pricing 3/3/05 3:21 PM Page 164

NOTES

BUDGET

TOTAL TIME

Miscellaneous
Travel
Messengers
Insurance
Storage
Shipping and Handling
Other
TOTAL
All information in this proposal is subject to the Terms and Conditions listed below.

TERMS AND CONDITIONS
Change Orders

Billable Items

Purchasing

Deposits

Custom Orders

Warranty
Other Contracts
Purchase Orders
Schedule of Payment

Termination Policy
Terms of Proposal

Work change orders will be issued for additional work and changes requested after approval of plans or commencement
of work. WCOs include a description of the change/addition requested, estimated additional costs, and changes to work
schedules/project completion. The client’s signature is required on WCOs to proceed with changes/additions.
In addition to the fees and costs estimated herein, costs incurred for insurance, storage, messengers, and shipping and
handling are billable (at cost, with a markup of ——%). Wherever applicable, state and local sales taxes will be
included in billable items.
All purchases made on client’s behalf will be billed to the client. In all cases, such prices will reflect a (discount)
(markup) of ——%. Charges for sales tax, insurance, storage, and shipping and handling are additional to the price of
each purchase. In the event the client purchases materials, services, or any items other than those specified by the
designer, the designer is not liable for the cost, quality, workmanship, condition, or appearance of such items.
A 50 percent deposit is required on all orders made on behalf of the client, prior to the placement of such orders. The
balance is due upon delivery. Any items canceled by the client more than 5 business days after designer has received
the client’s approval to purchase will be billed at —— percent of the price of the item.
The client is fully responsible for paying all costs for custom orders canceled by the client once manufacturing has started. The cost of special orders that are canceled by the client following approval to purchase is fully dependent upon the
terms and conditions put forth by the manufacturer, supplier, or vendor of the item(s).
The designer makes no additional warranty, guarantee, or any other assurances, other than those provided by the manufacturers, suppliers, or vendors of products and/or services.
The designer is not responsible for any contracts that the client enters into directly with contractors, suppliers, manufacturers, or vendors for goods and/or services, whether or not such sources are recommended by the designer.
The designer is responsible for those purchase orders issued directly by the designer. The client is fully responsible for all purchase orders issued by the client. Responsibility includes, but is not limited to, errors, omissions, pricing, and scheduling.
Hourly Rate: Regular billing periods (bimonthly, monthly) based on hours consumed or periodic approval points.
Square Footage: Billing may be —— percent upon project commencement, —— percent following completion of
design development, —— percent upon completion of punch list items. Flat Fee: —— percent of fee payable upon
signing of contract, —— percent upon approval of final design development phase, —— percent upon completion of
punch list items.
The client and the designer may terminate project based upon mutually agreeable terms to be determined in writing,
either prior to signing of this proposal or within the final Client-Designer Contract.
The information contained in this proposal is valid for 30 days. Proposals approved and signed by the client are binding upon the designer and the client beginning on the date of the client’s signature.

If the information in this proposal meets with the client’s approval, the client’s signature below authorizes the designer to begin work.
Kindly return a signed copy of this proposal/agreement to the designer’s office.
Designer Signature ————————————— Print Designer Name
Client Signature —————————————— Print Client Name

———————————— Date —————————
————————————— Date —————————

(04)Appendix IDG Pricing 3/3/05 3:21 PM Page 165

Comprehensive Production Schedule
ALL PROJECTS
Job Name

Phase

Key Dates

Staff

Sources

Notes

INDIVIDUAL PROJECTS
CLIENT
Name ——————————————————————————————————————————————————————————
PROJECT
Job Name —————————————————————————————————————————————————————————
Location —————————————————————————————————————————————————————————
Job Number ————————————————————————————————————————————————————————

Phase/Item

Schedule

Due Dates

Completed

Program Development
Client Intake Meetings
Site Conditions: Measurements and Notes
Research
Preliminary Color/Materials (“Mood”) Boards
Preliminary Budget/Schedule Estimates
Program Presentation
Revisions
Client Sign-Off
Design Development—Phase One—Schematics
Site Plan Base Drawings
Traffic Patterns
Space/Layout Plans
Preliminary Plans and Selections
Walls
Floors
Ceilings
Window Treatments
Millwork
Fixtures and Hardware
Furniture

Spa/Exercise Furnishings
Linens, Rugs, Decorative Items
Presentation/Sample Boards
Budget/Schedule Estimates
Design Development Presentation
Revisions
Client Sign-Off

A PPENDIX : B USINESS F ORMS

Audio/Video

■

165

The Interior Designer’s Guide to P RICING, E STIMATING, and B UDGETING

■

166

(04)Appendix IDG Pricing 3/3/05 3:21 PM Page 166

Phase/Item
Design Development—Phase Two—Final
Final Site Plan Base Drawings
Final Traffic Patterns
Final Space/Layout Plans
Final Plans and Selections
Walls
Floors
Ceilings
Window Treatments
Millwork
Fixtures and Hardware
Furniture
Audio/Video
Spa/Exercise Furnishings
Linens, Rugs, Decorative Items
Final Presentation/Sample Boards
Final Budget/Schedule
Final Design Development Presentation
Revisions
Client Sign-Off
Contract Documents and Bids
Bid Drawings and Specs
Bid Review
Client Review of Bids
Revisions
Client Sign-Off
Vendor Selection and Contract Documents
Project Implementation
Purchasing—Stock Items
Wall Fabrics/Finishes
Flooring Material
Ceiling Materials
Window Treatments
Fixtures and Hardware
Furniture
Audio/Video
Spa/Exercise Furnishings
Linens, Rugs, Decorative Items
Storage/Shipping/Handling
Miscellaneous

Schedule

Due Dates

Completed

(04)Appendix IDG Pricing 3/3/05 3:21 PM Page 167

Phase/Item

Schedule

Due Dates

Completed

Fabrication—Custom Orders
Wall Fabrics/Finishes
Flooring Material
Ceiling Materials
Window Treatments
Millwork
Fixtures and Hardware
Furniture
Audio/Video/Security/Other Electronic
Linens, Rugs, Decorative Items
Storage/Shipping/Handling
Miscellaneous
Construction—Site Supervision
Scheduling
Walls
Floors
Ceilings
Miscellaneous
Installation—Site Supervision
Custom Wall Painting/Coverings
Custom Floor Treatments
Custom Ceiling Treatments
Custom Window Treatments
Millwork
Fixtures and Hardware
Furniture
Audio/Video/Security/Other Electronic
Spa/Exercise Furnishings
Linens, Rugs, Decorative Items
Miscellaneous
Final Project Completion Items

Supervision of Punch List Completion
Client Sign-Off

A PPENDIX : B USINESS F ORMS

Walk-Through and Punch List

■

167

The Interior Designer’s Guide to P RICING, E STIMATING, and B UDGETING

■

168

(04)Appendix IDG Pricing 3/3/05 3:22 PM Page 168

Sample Time Sheet

Name
Month
Dates
Year

Natalie Jaye
12
1–7
2002

Phase Codes

Phases

Activity Codes

Program Development

Client Relations
(Meetings/
Presentations)

Not a Detail Item

Design Development—
Phase One (Schematic)

Travel

Walls/Ceilings

Design Development—
Phase Two (Final)

Budget/Schedule/
Proposal

Floors/Stairways

Contract Documents
and Bids

Site Visit/Inspection/
Supervision

Window Treatments

Project Implementation

Research

Millwork

Project Completion

D
P
M

Designing/Drawing
Presentation Drawing
Model Building

05
06
07

Spec Writing and Drawing

X
Y
Z

Spec Review and Selection 09
Shopping/Purchasing
10
Coordination/Administration/
Meetings

Fixtures and Hardware
Furniture
Audio/Video/Security/
Other Electronic
Spa/Exercise
Furnishings
Other Furnishings
Meetings

Project Number

Project Name

Date

C01-TCN-1A
C01-TCN-1A
C01-TCN-1A
C01-BGS-1

Blue Oyster Restaurant—Bar
Blue Oyster Restaurant—Bar
Blue Oyster Restaurant—Bar
Appleby’s Farm Store

Mon

C01-TCN-1B
C01-TCN-1B
C01-TCN-1B
C01-TCN-1B

Subtotal
Blue Oyster Restaurant—Dining Room
Blue Oyster Restaurant—Dining Room
Blue Oyster Restaurant—Dining Room
Blue Oyster Restaurant—Dining Room

C01-TCN-1A
C01-BGS-1

C01-TCN-1A
C01-TCN-1A

Subtotal
Blue Oyster Restaurant—Bar
Appleby’s Farm Store
Nonbillable
Subtotal
Nonbillable
Blue Oyster Restaurant—Bar
Blue Oyster Restaurant—Bar

Phase Code Activity Code

1
1
1
PM

C
C
B
C

Activities

Detail Code

Total
Billable Notes

2
3
2
1
8
2
2
1
3

3
2
2
1
3

8
2
3
3

8
2
0
0

8
8
4
4

0
0

2
0
4
4

01
02
03
04

Wed

1
PM
EA

S
P

00
00

Thurs
Fri

SK
2

Subtotal

Time
Reg
OT

00
10
00
10

Tues

Detail Codes Detail Items

01
02

0
3
0
0

Internal Meeting—
Plan Presentation

Dentist Appointment

Sat
Sun
Totals

Approved ————————————————————————
Date Posted ———————————————————————

21 131%

Nonbillable Codes
General Administration
Maintenance
Promotion/Marketing
Holidays
Sick Days
Excused Absences (Jury Duty,
Bereavement, etc.)

GA
MN
PM
HD
SK
EA

(04)Appendix IDG Pricing 3/3/05 3:24 PM Page 169

Time Sheet
Name ————————————————————————————
Month ————————————————————————————
Dates ————————————————————————————
Year —————————————————————————————

Project Number

Project Name

Date

Phase Code Activity Code

Detail Code

Time
Reg
OT

Total
Billable

Notes

Totals

Date Posted ———————————————————————

A PPENDIX : B USINESS F ORMS

Approved ————————————————————————

■

169

The Interior Designer’s Guide to P RICING, E STIMATING, and B UDGETING

■

170

(04)Appendix IDG Pricing 3/3/05 3:24 PM Page 170

Purchase Log
CLIENT
Name ————————————————————————————————————————————————————
PROJECT
Job Name ——————————————————————————————————————————————————
Location ——————————————————————————————————————————————————
Job Number —————————————————————————————————————————————————
Bid Documents
Item

Vendor

Order
Contact Info.

Specs

Drawings

Catalog
Info.

Pricing
Swatches/
Samples

P.O.
Number

P.O.
Total

Change
Orders

Invoice
Total

(04)Appendix IDG Pricing 3/3/05 3:24 PM Page 171

—

Pricing
Change
Orders

Schedule
Invoice
Total

Order
Date

Delivery/
Due

Storage
Received/
Completed

Location

Ticket
Number

Out

A PPENDIX : B USINESS F ORMS
■

171

The Interior Designer’s Guide to P RICING, E STIMATING, and B UDGETING

■

172

(04)Appendix IDG Pricing 3/3/05 3:24 PM Page 172

Purchase Order
Job Number ————————————————

P.O. Number —————————————————

To:

Date ————————————————————

Vendor ——————————————————

Phone————————————————————

Address——————————————————

Fax —————————————————————

Contact ——————————————————

E-mail————————————————————

Schedule

Delivery Due:

Installation Completed:

SPECIFICATIONS
Item Number

Description

Quantity

Unit Price

Other

Subtotal

NOTES

Shipping/Handling
Tax
Total
Deposit
Balance Due

Ship to: —————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————
Bill to:

—————————————————————————————

————————————————————————————————
————————————————————————————————
Ordered by
Signature —————————————————

Phone ————————————————————

Print name ————————————————

Fax —————————————————————

Total

(04)Appendix IDG Pricing 3/3/05 3:24 PM Page 173

Work Change Order
Client ————————————————————————

Change Order Number ——————————————————

Project ———————————————————————

Date ————————————————————————

Work Change Requested By ————————————————

Job Number —————————————————————

Phase
Program Development

❏

Design Development—Schematics

❏

Design Development—Final

❏

Contract Documents and Bids

❏

Implementation

❏

Work Change Description

Cost Change

Schedule Change

This is not an invoice. Revised specifications on work in progress represents information that is either different from that which the original project
budget and schedule were based upon, or follows after client’s approval to the stage of work in which this (these) item(s) appear(s). Changes in time
noted above. Kindly return a signed and dated copy of this form to:

Authorized Signature ———————————————————
Print Name ——————————————————————
Date —————————————————————————

A PPENDIX : B USINESS F ORMS

and cost quoted here may be approximate, unless otherwise noted. Your signature below will constitute authorization to proceed with the change(s)

■

173

The Interior Designer’s Guide to P RICING, E STIMATING, and B UDGETING

■

174

(04)Appendix IDG Pricing 3/3/05 3:24 PM Page 174

Designer-Client Agreement for Residential Project
[Designer’s Letterhead]
Date
Ms. Alice Client
123 Main Street
Greenwich, CT 06830
Dear Ms. Client:
We are delighted to have been selected by you for your interior design project (the “Project”). This letter is to set forth
the terms under which we will work together.

1. Description. We agree to design the Project in accordance with ❏ the following plan ❏ the plan attached hereto as Schedule A and made part of this agreement.
Project location, including identification of areas, square footage, and likely number of occupants:

Scope of work to be performed:

Scope of work set forth in project phases:
Program plan. We shall consult with you to ascertain your goals, interview the people who will use the space, visit
the premises and make measurements, prepare designs and renderings, and offer recommendations for purchases
of merchandise and construction (including sample materials, when helpful). Other services we will render during
this phase include:

❏ If this box is checked, Designer shall prepare an estimated budget to include in the presentation, but you acknowledge that this budget is subject to change and is not a guarantee on our part with respect to the prices contained
therein.
Design documents. After your approval of the presentation, we shall prepare interior architectural drawings for the
following areas ——————————————————————————————————————
——————————————————, which, after your further approval, shall be submitted for competitive

(04)Appendix IDG Pricing 3/3/05 3:24 PM Page 175

bids to contractors selected by you after consultation with us. In addition, we shall prepare purchase orders for merchandise and construction for your approval. Other services we will render during this phase include:

Design implementation. We shall visit the Project with the following frequency ————————————— ,
discuss the status of the work with you, and be available to consult with you with respect to whether what is being
delivered or constructed is in conformity with specifications and of suitable quality. However, the quality and supervision of merchandise or construction shall be the responsibility of the suppliers or contractors. Other services we
will render during this phase include:

Services to be rendered by us in addition to those described above:

2. Schedule. We agree to make our presentation within _____ days after the later of the signing of this Agreement
or, if you are to provide reference, layouts, measurements, or other materials specified here ____________________ ,

______________________________________________________________________________________________
after you have provided this to us.
After approval of the presentation, we shall ❏ make reasonable efforts to progress the Project; or ❏ shall conform to
the following schedule: ____________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
based on an intended occupancy date of ___________________________________________________ .
You understand that delays by you, suppliers, or contractors may delay performance of our duties, and our time to
perform shall be extended if such delays occur. In addition, if we or you are unable to perform any obligations hereunder because of fire or other casualty, strike, act or order of a public authority, act of God, or other cause beyond
our or your control, then performance shall be excused during the pendency of such cause.

A PPENDIX : B USINESS F ORMS

3. Purchases of merchandise and construction shall be handled in the following manner:
❏ We shall pay for purchases of merchandise, and you shall pay for construction.
❏ We shall commit to purchases of merchandise and construction as your agent, but you shall make payment
directly to the suppliers or contractors.
❏ You shall pay for purchases of merchandise and construction.
❏ We shall pay for purchases of merchandise and construction.
❏ Other arrangement ______________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

■

175

The Interior Designer’s Guide to P RICING, E STIMATING, and B UDGETING

■

176

(04)Appendix IDG Pricing 3/3/05 3:24 PM Page 176

If we are paying for either merchandise or construction, you shall give advance approvals by signing written authorizations. You shall pay us in full for lighting fixtures, fabrics, wallpaper, plants, flatware, crystal, linen, china, and other
household items, pay a deposit of ____ percent for other merchandise; and pay a deposit of ____ percent for construction. You understand that we shall not place any order until after receipt of the signed approval with appropriate payment. Once we place such an order, it cannot be cancelled by you. If a deposit has been made, the full
balance due shall be paid by you prior to delivery, installation, or completion of construction.
If we are acting as your agent, you shall approve all purchases of merchandise or construction by signing a written
authorization.
We shall prepare purchase orders for purchases of merchandise or construction and shall advise you as to acceptability, but shall have no liability for the lateness, malfeasance, negligence, or failure of suppliers or contractors to
perform their responsibilities and duties. In the event that, after your approval for purchases of merchandise or construction, changed circumstances cause an increase in price or other change with respect to any such purchases
of merchandise or construction, we shall notify you in writing, but shall bear no liability with respect to the changed
circumstances, and you shall be fully responsible with respect to the purchases of merchandise or construction. We
make no warranties or guarantees as to merchandise or construction, including but not limited to fading, wear, or
latent defects, but will assign to you any rights we may have against suppliers or contractors, and you may pursue
claims against such suppliers or contractors at your expense.
If you pay directly for purchases of merchandise or construction, you shall make certain that we receive copies of all
invoices.
You shall be responsible for the payment of sales tax, packing, shipping, and any related charges on such purchases of merchandise or construction.
4. Approvals. On our request, you shall approve plans, drawings, renderings, purchase orders, and similar documents by returning a signed copy of each such document or a signed authorization referencing such documents to us.
5. Your Responsibilities. You shall cooperate throughout the Project by promptly providing us with necessary
information; arranging any interviews that may be needed; making access available to the project site; giving prompt
attention to documents to review and requested approvals; facilitating communications between us and other professionals, such as architects and engineers whom you have retained; and, if necessary, designating the following
person ____________________ to act as liaison with us. If you are to provide specifications, floor plans, surveys, drawings, or related information, this shall be at your expense, and we shall be held harmless for relying on the accuracy
of what you have provided. If at any time you have knowledge of a deviation from specifications or other problem
with the Project, you shall promptly give notice in writing to us. You shall be responsible for receiving, inspecting, and
storing all deliveries, except that we shall assist in this as follows:

6. Remuneration. You agree to pay us on the following basis, as selected by a check mark in the appropriate box
or boxes:
❏ Retail/list price plus a percentage of construction costs. We shall purchase merchandise at retail/list price and
shall be compensated through the discount customarily allowed designers from such retail/list prices. If construction

(04)Appendix IDG Pricing 3/3/05 3:24 PM Page 177

is required, we shall be paid a markup of _____ percent of construction expenditures. You shall pay us a nonrefundable retainer of $________ on the signing of this Agreement, which retainer shall be applied to reduce the last
payments due to us from you or, if insufficient purchases of merchandise and construction are made for the retainer
to be so applied, shall be retained as a design fee.
❏ Flat fee plus a percentage of costs. Our compensation shall be a nonrefundable design fee of $________, paid by
you on the signing of this Agreement, plus an additional markup of ____ percent of the expenditures for merchandise
and ____ percent of the expenditures for construction, except that the following budget items shall not be included
in this calculation:

Regardless of whether payment is made by us or you, all purchases of merchandise and construction for the Project
shall be included for the purpose of computing remuneration due us, except for the following exclusions:

In addition, you may append to this Agreement a list of items owned by you prior to commencement of the Project
and use these items without any additional fee being charged by us.
❏ If an Estimated Budget is required by you, an additional fee of $_____ shall be charged for its preparation.
In the event that design services beyond the scope of work for this Project are requested by you and we are able to
accommodate your request, we shall bill for such additional services as follows:

7. Revisions. During the development of the Project, we shall make a reasonable amount of revisions requested
by you without additional charge, but if the revisions are requested after approvals by you, an additional fee shall be
charged as follows:

At the time of signing this agreement, you shall pay us $_______ as a nonrefundable advance against expenses. If
the advance exceeds expenses incurred, the credit balance shall be used to reduce the fee payable or, if the fee
has been fully paid, shall be reimbursed to you. Expenses shall in no event include any portion of our overhead.

A PPENDIX : B USINESS F ORMS

8. Expenses. In addition to the payments pursuant to Paragraphs 6 and 7, you agree to reimburse us for all
expenses connected to the Project, including but not limited to messengers, long-distance telephone calls, overnight
deliveries, and local travel expenses. These expenses shall be marked up ____ percent by us when billed to you. In
the event that travel beyond the local area is required, the expenses for this travel shall be billed as follows:

■

177

The Interior Designer’s Guide to P RICING, E STIMATING, and B UDGETING

■

178

(04)Appendix IDG Pricing 3/3/05 3:24 PM Page 178

9. Payment. You agree to pay us within _____ days of receipt of our billings for remuneration, expenses, or purchases of merchandise or construction. Overdue payments shall be subject to interest charges of _____ percent
monthly. In the event that we are the winning party in a lawsuit brought pursuant to this agreement, you shall reimburse us for the costs of the lawsuit, including attorney’s fees.
10. Term and Termination. This agreement shall have a term that expires on __________ , 20___ The term shall automatically renew for additional ________ periods unless notice of termination is given either by us or you thirty (30) calendar days in advance of the renewal commencement. In addition, this agreement may be terminated at any time
for cause by either party notifying the other party in writing of that party’s breach of the Agreement and giving ten
(10) business days for a cure, after which the notifying party may terminate if there has been no cure of the breach.
Causes for termination shall include, but not be limited to, failure to perform any duty pursuant to this agreement in
a timely manner and postponements of the Project for more than ____ business days in total. While reserving all other
rights under this Agreement, in the event that the Project is terminated, we shall have the right to be paid by you
through the date of termination for our work, for any purchases by us of merchandise and construction pursuant to
purchase orders approved by you, and for our expenses.
11. Ownership of Design. We shall retain ownership of the design, including any drawings, renderings,
sketches, samples, or other materials prepared by us during the course of the Project. Our ownership shall
include any copyrights, trademarks, patents, or other proprietary rights existing in the design. You shall not use
the design for additions to this Project or for any other project without obtaining our permission and paying
appropriate compensation.
12. Consultants. If outside consultants, including but not limited to architects, structural engineers, mechanical
engineers, acoustical engineers, and lighting designers, are needed for the Project, they shall be retained and paid
for by you, and we shall cooperate fully with these consultants. Such consultants shall be responsible for code compliance in the various areas of their expertise.
13. Publicity. We shall have the right to document the Project in progress and when completed, by photography or
other means, which we may use for portfolio, brochure, public display, and similar publicity purposes. Your name
and the location of the Project may be used in connection with the documentation, unless specified to the contrary
_____________________ . If we choose to document the Project, we shall pay the costs of documentation. In addition, if
you document the Project, we shall be given credit as the designer for the Project if your documentation is released
to the public.
14. Relationship of Parties. We and you are both independent contractors. This agreement is not an employment
agreement, nor does it constitute a joint venture or partnership between us and you. Nothing contained herein shall
be construed to be inconsistent with this independent contractor relationship.
15. Assignment. Neither our nor your rights and duties may be assigned by either party without the written consent
of the other party, except that we may assign payments due hereunder.
16. Arbitration. All disputes arising under this Agreement shall be submitted to binding arbitration before
_________________________ in the following location ____________________________ and settled in accordance with the
rules of the American Arbitration Association. Judgment upon the arbitration award may be entered in any court having jurisdiction thereof. Disputes in which the amount at issue is less than $____________ shall not be subject to this
arbitration provision.

(04)Appendix IDG Pricing 3/3/05 3:24 PM Page 179

17. Miscellany. This agreement shall be binding on both us and you, as well as heirs, successors, assigns, and personal representatives. This agreement constitutes the entire understanding. Its terms can be modified only by an
instrument in writing signed by both us and you. Notices shall be sent by certified mail or traceable overnight delivery to us or you at our present addresses, and notification of any change of address shall be given prior to that
change of address taking effect. A waiver of a breach of any of the provisions of this agreement shall not be construed as a continuing waiver of other breaches of the same or other provisions hereof. This agreement shall be
governed by the laws of the State of _____________ .
If this agreement meets with your approval, please sign beneath the words “Agreed to” to make this a binding
agreement between us and you. Please sign both copies and return one copy for our files. We look forward to working with you.
AGREED TO

Sincerely yours,
XYZ Interior Design, Inc.

By: ————————————————— By: —————————————————
Alice Client

Authorized Signatory, Title

A PPENDIX : B USINESS F ORMS
■

179

The Interior Designer’s Guide to P RICING, E STIMATING, and B UDGETING

■

180

(04)Appendix IDG Pricing 3/3/05 3:24 PM Page 180

Designer-Client Agreement for Commercial Project
Agreement as of the _____ day of ___________ , 20_____ , between ____________________________________________________ ,
located at ________________________________________________________ (hereinafter referred to as the “Client”) and
______________________________________, located at ____________________________________________ (hereinafter referred
to as the “Designer”) with respect to an interior design project (hereinafter referred to as the “Project”).
Whereas, the Designer is a professional interior designer of good standing;
Whereas, the Client wishes the Designer to design the Project described more fully herein; and
Whereas, the Designer wishes to design this Project;
Now, therefore, in consideration of the foregoing premises and the mutual covenants hereinafter set forth and other
valuable considerations, the parties hereto agree as follows:
1. Description. The Designer agrees to design the Project in accordance with ❏ the following plan ❏ the plan
attached hereto as Schedule A and made part of this agreement.
Project location, including identification of areas, square footage, and likely number of occupants:

Scope of work to be performed by Designer: _____________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Designer’s scope of work set forth in project phases:
Programming ______________________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Design Concept ___________________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Decoration _____________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Contract Documentation ___________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Contract Administration ____________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

(04)Appendix IDG Pricing 3/3/05 3:24 PM Page 181

❏ If this box is checked, the Designer shall prepare an estimated budget to include with the Design Concept for
presentation to the Client, but the Client acknowledges that this budget is subject to change and is not a guarantee
on the part of the Designer with respect to the prices contained therein.
As the work is in progress, the Designer shall visit the Project with the following frequency _________________ , discuss
the status of the work with the Client, and be available to consult with the Client with respect to whether what is being
delivered or constructed is in conformity with specifications and of suitable quality. However, the quality and supervision of merchandise or construction shall be the responsibility of the suppliers or contractors.
Services to be rendered by the Designer in addition to those described above: ____________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
2. Schedule. The Designer agrees to make its presentation within _____ days after the later of the signing of this
Agreement or, if the Client is to provide reference, layouts, measurements, or other materials specified here
___________ ____________________________ , after the Client has provided same to the Designer. After approval of the
presentation, the Designer shall ❏ make reasonable efforts to progress the Project; or ❏ shall conform to the following
schedule ___________________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
based on an intended occupancy date of ________________________________________ .
The Client understands that delays on the part of the Client or suppliers may delay performance of the Designer’s
duties, and the Designer’s time to perform shall be extended if such delays occur. In addition, if either party hereto
is unable to perform any of its obligations hereunder by reason of fire or other casualty, strike, act or order of a public authority, act of God, or other cause beyond the control of such party, then such party shall be excused from such
performance during the pendency of such cause.
3.

Purchases shall be handled in the following manner:
❏ The Client shall pay for purchases of merchandise and construction.
❏ The Designer shall commit to purchases of merchandise and construction as the agent of the Client, who shall
make payment directly to the suppliers or contractors.
❏ Other arrangement ____________________________________________________________________________________________
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

If the Designer is acting as agent for the Client, the Client shall approve all purchases by signing a written authorization.

A PPENDIX : B USINESS F ORMS

The Designer ❏ shall ❏ shall not prepare purchase orders for purchases of merchandise or construction and shall
advise the Client as to acceptability, but shall have no liability for the lateness, malfeasance, negligence, or failure
of suppliers or contractors to perform their responsibilities and duties. In the event that, after the Client’s approval for
purchases of merchandise or construction, changed circumstances cause an increase in price or other change with
respect to any such purchases of merchandise or construction, the Designer shall notify the Client in writing, but shall bear
no liability with respect to the changed circumstances, and the Client shall be fully responsible with respect to the
purchases of merchandise or construction. The Designer makes no warranties or guarantees as to merchandise or construction, including but not limited to fading, wear, or latent defects, but will assign to the Client any rights the Designer may have
against suppliers or contractors, and the Client may pursue claims against such suppliers or contractors at its own expense.

■

181

The Interior Designer’s Guide to P RICING, E STIMATING, and B UDGETING

■

182

(04)Appendix IDG Pricing 3/3/05 3:24 PM Page 182

The Client shall make certain that the Designer receives copies of all purchase orders and invoices.
The Client shall be responsible for the payment of sales tax, packing, shipping, and any related charges on such
purchases.
4. Approvals by Client. On the Designer’s request, the Client shall approve plans, drawings, renderings, purchase
orders, and similar documents by returning a signed copy of each such document or a signed authorization referencing such documents to the Designer.
5. Client Responsibilities. The Client shall cooperate throughout the Project by promptly providing the Designer
with necessary information; arranging any interviews that may be needed; making access available to the project
site; giving prompt attention to documents to review and requested approvals; facilitating communications between
the Designer and other professionals, such as architects and engineers whom the Client has retained; and, if necessary, designating the following person ______________ to act as liaison with the Designer. If the Client is to provide
specifications, floor plans, surveys, drawings, or related information, this shall be at the Client’s expense, and the
Designer shall be held harmless for relying on the accuracy of what the Client has provided. If at any time the Client
has knowledge of a deviation from specifications or other problem with the Project, the Client shall promptly give
notice in writing to the Designer. The Client shall be responsible for receiving, inspecting, and storing all deliveries,
except that the Designer shall assist in this as follows:
____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________
6. Remuneration. The Client agrees to pay the Designer on the following basis, as selected by a check mark in
the appropriate box or boxes:
❏ Hourly or per diem rate. The Designer shall bill its usual hourly or per diem rates. The Client shall pay a nonrefundable design fee of $______ on the signing of this Agreement. Thereafter, the Client shall pay a monthly retainer
on the first day of each month in the amount of $______ until _______________ . The Designer shall render billings on a
_________ basis, applying the design fee and retainer payments thereto, and the Client shall pay any balance due on
the billings within _______ days of receipt.
❏ Flat fee plus a percentage of costs. The Designer’s compensation shall be a nonrefundable design fee of $________
paid by the Client on the signing of this Agreement, plus an additional markup of ____ percent of the expenditures for
merchandise and ____ percent of the expenditures for construction, except that the following budget items shall not
be included in this calculation: _____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
❏ Flat fee. The Designer’s compensation shall be a design fee of $______ , which shall start with a nonrefundable payment of $______ by the Client, with the balance paid in installments of $______ on the following schedule:
____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________
If the Project continues beyond _______________ , an additional fee of $______ shall be paid each month until completion.
In the event that the Designer’s remuneration is based, in whole or in part, on the amount expended for the Project,
all purchases of merchandise and construction for the Project shall be included for the purpose of computing

(04)Appendix IDG Pricing 3/3/05 3:24 PM Page 183

remuneration due the Designer, except for the following exclusions: ______________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
In addition, the Client may append to this Agreement a list of items owned by the Client prior to commencement of
the Project and use these items without any additional fee being charged by the Designer.
❏ If an Estimated Budget is required by the Client, an additional fee of $_____ shall be charged for its preparation.
In the event that design services beyond the scope of work for this Project are requested by the Client and the
Designer is able to accommodate Client’s request, the Designer shall bill for such additional services as follows:
____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
7. Revisions. During the development of the Project, the Designer shall make a reasonable amount of revisions
requested by the Client without additional charge, but if the revisions are requested after approvals by the Client, an
additional fee shall be charged as follows: _________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ .
8. Expenses. In addition to the payments pursuant to Paragraphs 6 and 7, the Client agrees to reimburse the Designer
for all expenses connected to the Project, including but not limited to messengers, long-distance telephone calls,
overnight deliveries, and local travel expenses. These expenses shall be marked up ____ percent by the Designer
when billed to the Client. In the event that travel beyond the local area is required, the expenses for this travel shall
______________ .
be billed as follows: ___________________________________________________________________________________
At the time of signing this Agreement, the Client shall pay the Designer $_______ as a nonrefundable advance against
expenses. If the advance exceeds expenses incurred, the credit balance shall be used to reduce the fee payable
or, if the fee has been fully paid, shall be reimbursed to the Client. Expenses shall in no event include any portion of
the Designer’s overhead.
9. Payment. The Client agrees to pay the Designer within _____ days of receipt of the Designer’s billings for purchases, remuneration, or expenses. Overdue payments shall be subject to interest charges of _____ percent monthly.
In the event that the Designer is the winning party in a lawsuit brought pursuant to this Agreement, the Client shall
reimburse the Designer for the costs of the lawsuit, including attorney’s fees.

A PPENDIX : B USINESS F ORMS

10. Term and Termination. This Agreement shall have a term that expires on __________ , 20___ . The term shall automatically renew for additional ________ periods unless notice of termination is given by either party thirty (30) calendar days in advance of the renewal commencement. In addition, this Agreement may be terminated at any time
for cause by either party notifying the other party in writing of that party’s breach of the Agreement and giving
ten (10) business days for a cure, after which the notifying party may terminate if there has been no cure of the
breach. Causes for termination shall include, but not be limited to, failure to perform any duty pursuant to this
Agreement in a timely manner and postponements of the Project for more than ____ business days in total. While
reserving all other rights under this Agreement, in the event that the Project is terminated, the Designer shall
have the right to be paid by the Client through the date of termination for the Designer’s work, for any purchases
by the Designer of merchandise and construction pursuant to purchase orders approved by the Client, and for
the Designer’s expenses.

■

183

The Interior Designer’s Guide to P RICING, E STIMATING, and B UDGETING

■

184

(04)Appendix IDG Pricing 3/3/05 3:24 PM Page 184

11. Ownership of Design. The Designer shall retain ownership of the design, including any drawings, renderings,
sketches, samples, or other materials prepared by the Designer during the course of the Project. The Designer’s
ownership shall include any copyrights, trademarks, patents, or other proprietary rights existing in the design. The
Client shall not use the design for additions to this Project or for any other project without the permission of the
Designer and appropriate compensation.
12. Consultants. If outside consultants, including but not limited to architects, structural engineers, mechanical
engineers, acoustical engineers, and lighting designers, are needed for the Project, they shall be retained and paid
for by the Client, and the Designer shall cooperate fully with these consultants. Such consultants shall be responsible for code compliance in the various areas of their expertise.
13. Publicity. The Designer shall have the right to document the Project in progress and when completed, by photography or other means, which the Designer may use for portfolio, brochure, public display, and similar publicity purposes. The name of the Client and location of the Project may be used in connection with the documentation, unless
specified to the contrary _____________________ . If the Designer chooses to document the Project, the Designer shall
pay the costs of documentation. In addition, if the Client documents the Project, the Designer shall be given credit
as the designer for the Project if the Client’s documentation is released to the public.
14. Relationship of Parties. Both parties agree that the Designer is an independent contractor. This Agreement is
not an employment agreement, nor does it constitute a joint venture or partnership between the Designer and the
Client. Nothing contained herein shall be construed to be inconsistent with this independent contractor relationship.
15. Assignment. This Agreement may not be assigned by either party without the written consent of the other party
hereto, except that the Designer may assign payments due hereunder to other parties.
16. Arbitration. All disputes arising under this Agreement shall be submitted to binding arbitration before
_________________________ in the following location ____________________________ and settled in accordance with the
rules of the American Arbitration Association. Judgment upon the arbitration award may be entered in any court having jurisdiction thereof. Disputes in which the amount at issue is less than $____________ shall not be subject to this
arbitration provision.
17. Miscellany. This Agreement shall be binding upon the parties hereto, their heirs, successors, assigns, and personal representatives. This Agreement constitutes the entire understanding between the parties. Its terms can be
modified only by an instrument in writing signed by both parties. Notices shall be sent by certified mail or traceable
overnight delivery to the parties at the addresses shown herein, and notification of any change of address shall be
given prior to that change of address taking effect. A waiver of a breach of any of the provisions of this Agreement
shall not be construed as a continuing waiver of other breaches of the same or other provisions hereof. This
Agreement shall be governed by the laws of the State of ___________________ .
In Witness Whereof, the parties hereto have signed this Agreement as of the date first set forth above.
Designer ____________________________
Company Name

By ___________________________________
Authorized Signatory, Title

Client _____________________________
Company Name

By ________________________________
Authorized Signatory, Title

(04)Appendix IDG Pricing 3/3/05 3:24 PM Page 185

Contract Summary Sheet
Client ______________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Address ___________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Telephone _______________________________________ Fax _______________________________________
Cell phone _______________________________________ E-mail _____________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
Contact at Client _______________________________
Representative for Designer ________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________
Description of Project __________________________
_______________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________
_________________________________________________________________________________________
Full description appears in ❏ the agreement, or ❏ schedule attached to the agreement
When does the agreement commence? _____________________________________________________________________________
What is the schedule for the Project? _________________________________________________________________________________
Is there a projected occupancy date? _______________________________________________________________________________
How will purchases of merchandise or construction be handled in terms of which party is paying, which party is
preparing purchase orders, substitutions, exclusions, and what deposits or working funds will be made available?
____________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________
How will remuneration be handled, including requests for work beyond the scope of the Project?

Has an estimated budget been requested for inclusion with the presentation of the design concept? ❏ Yes ❏ No
If such estimated budget has been requested, will an additional fee be charged and, if so, how will it be computed?

What expenses are billable? _________________________________________________________________________________________________
How long does the Client have to pay billings after receipt of invoices? ____________________________________________________
What interest rate can be charged on overdue invoices? ___________________________________________________________________

A PPENDIX : B USINESS F ORMS

When will revisions be billable? ______________________________________________________________________________________________

■

185

The Interior Designer’s Guide to P RICING, E STIMATING, and B UDGETING

■

186

(04)Appendix IDG Pricing 3/3/05 3:24 PM Page 186

What is the term of the agreement? _________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Has the Client placed any restrictions on publicizing the project? _________________________________________________________________________
__
____
What is the position of the person signing the agreement for the Client? ____________________________________________________________
Does the agreement include the Designer’s standard provisions as follows:
That the quality and supervision of merchandise or construction shall be the responsibility of the suppliers or
contractors? ❏ Yes ❏ No
That delays caused by the Client, suppliers, contractors, or acts of God, etc. shall extend the Designer’s time
to perform? ❏ Yes ❏ No
That the Designer shall have no liability for the lateness, malfeasance, negligence, or failure of suppliers or
contractors to perform their responsibilities and duties? ❏ Yes ❏ No
That the Designer shall have no liability if changed circumstances cause a change in price or other change
after the Client’s approval for purchases of merchandise or construction? ❏ Yes ❏ No
That the Designer makes no warranties or guarantees as to merchandise or construction, including but not limited
to fading, wear, or latent defects, but will assign to the Client any rights the Designer may have? ❏ Yes ❏ No
That the Client shall be responsible for the payment of sales tax, packing, shipping, and any related charges
on such purchases? ❏ Yes ❏ No
That the Client must sign approvals on the Designer’s request? ❏ Yes ❏ No
That the Client must meet the usual client responsibilities? ❏ Yes ❏ No
Does the Designer own all rights in the designs? ❏ Yes ❏ No
Is the Client responsible for retaining and paying other professional consultants? ❏ Yes ❏ No
Is there an arbitration provision? ❏ Yes ❏ No
Is there a standard “Miscellany” provision? ❏ Yes ❏ No
Has any standard provision been altered, and have any provisions been added to the agreement at the request of the Client?

_________________________
_________________________
_______________
Person completing this Contract Summary Sheet __________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
_________________________
____
Date completed __________

(04)Appendix IDG Pricing 3/3/05 3:24 PM Page 187

Client Approval
CLIENT
Name ————————————————————————
PROJECT
Job Name ———————————————————————
Location ———————————————————————
Job Number ——————————————————————
Phase
Program Development
Preliminary Color/Materials (“Mood”) Boards
Preliminary Budget/Schedule Estimates
Revisions
Approval to Proceed to Next Phase

Item

Initials

Date

Design Development—Phase One—Schematics
Site Plan Base Drawings
Traffic Patterns
Space/Layout Plans
Preliminary Plans and Selections
Walls
Floors
Ceilings
Window Treatments
Millwork
Fixtures and Hardware
Furniture
Audio/Video
Spa/Exercise Furnishings
Linens, Rugs, Decorative Items
Presentation/Sample Boards
Budget/Schedule Estimates
Revisions
Approval to Proceed to Next Phase

A PPENDIX : B USINESS F ORMS

Design Development—Phase Two—Final
Final Site Plan Base Drawings
Final Traffic Patterns
Final Space/Layout Plans
Final Plans and Selections
Walls
Floors
Ceilings
Window Treatments
Millwork
Fixtures and Hardware
Furniture
Audio/Video

■

187

The Interior Designer’s Guide to P RICING, E STIMATING, and B UDGETING

■

188

(04)Appendix IDG Pricing 3/3/05 3:24 PM Page 188

Phase
Spa/Exercise Furnishings
Linens, Rugs, Decorative Items
Final Presentation/Sample Boards
Final Budget/Schedule
Revisions
Approval to Proceed to Next Phase
Contract Documents and Bids
Bid Drawings and Specs
Client Review of Bids
Revisions
Approval to Proceed to Next Phase
Project Implementation
Purchasing—Stock Items
Wall Fabrics/Finishes
Flooring Material
Ceiling Materials
Window Treatments
Fixtures and Hardware
Furniture
Audio/Video
Spa/Exercise Furnishings
Linens, Rugs, Decorative Items
Storage/Shipping/Handling
Miscellaneous
Fabrication—Custom Orders
Wall Fabrics/Finishes
Flooring Material
Ceiling Materials
Window Treatments
Millwork
Fixtures and Hardware
Furniture
Audio/Video/Security/Other Electronic
Linens, Rugs, Decorative Items
Storage/Shipping/Handling
Miscellaneous
Construction—Site Supervision
Walls
Floors
Ceilings
Miscellaneous

Item

Initials

Date

(04)Appendix IDG Pricing 3/3/05 3:24 PM Page 189

Phase

Item

Initials

Date

Installation—Site Supervision
Custom Wall Painting/Coverings
Custom Floor Treatments
Custom Ceiling Treatments
Custom Window Treatments
Millwork
Fixtures and Hardware
Furniture
Audio/Video/Security/Other Electronic
Spa/Exercise Furnishings
Linens, Rugs, Decorative Items
Miscellaneous
Final Project Completion Items
Final Client Sign-Off

A PPENDIX : B USINESS F ORMS
■

189

(04)Appendix IDG Pricing 3/3/05 3:24 PM Page 190

(05)Bib IDG PricingEstimating 3/3/05 3:13 PM Page 191

Selected Bibliography

Berens, Linda V., and Dario Nardi. The Sixteen Personality Types,
Descriptions for Self-Discovery. New York: Telos Publications,
1999.
Crawford,Tad, and Eva Doman Bruck. Business and Legal Forms
for Interior Designers. Rev. ed. New York:Allworth Press, 2001.
DuBoff, Leonard D. The Law (in Plain English) for Small
Businesses. New York: Allworth Press, 1998.
Feldman, Franklin, Stephen E.Weil, and Susan Duke Biederman.
Art Law: Rights and Liabilities of Creators and Collectors. 2 vols.
Boston: Little, Brown and Company, 1986. Supp. 1993.
Foote, Cameron. The Business Side of Creativity: The Complete
Guide for Running a Graphic Design or Communications
Business. New York:W.W. Norton & Company, 1999.
Goleman, Daniel P. Emotional Intelligence:Why It Can Matter More
Than IQ. New York: Bantam Books, 1995.
Gray, John. Men Are from Mars,Women Are from Venus: A Practical
Guide for Improving Communication and Getting What You Want
in Relationships. New York: HarperCollins, 1992.
Keirsey, David, and Marilyn Bates. Please Understand Me:
Character and Temperament Types. 5th ed. Amherst, New York:
Prometheus Book Co., 1984
Knackstedt, Mary V. The Interior Design Business Handbook. 3rd
ed., New York: John Wiley & Sons, Inc., 2002
Lynch, Sarah. 77 Habits of Highly Creative Interior Designers: Insider
Secrets From the World’s Top Design Professionals. Gloucester,
Mass.: Rockport Publishers, 2003
Ries, Al, and Jack Trout. Positioning the Battle for Your Mind. 2nd
ed. New York: McGraw-Hill, 2001.

The Interior Designer’s Guide to P RICING, E STIMATING, and B UDGETING

■

192

(05)Bib IDG PricingEstimating 3/3/05 3:13 PM Page 192

Siegel, Harry. A Guide to Business Principles and Practices for Interior
Designers. New York:Watson-Guptill, 1982
Shim, Jae K., and Joel G. Siegel. Budgeting Basics and Beyond: A Complete
Step-by-Step Guide for Nonfinancial Managers. Upper Saddle River,
New Jersey: Prentice Hall, 1994.
Stearns, David. Opportunities in Interior Design and Decorating Careers. 2nd
ed. New York: McGraw-Hill, 2001
Weisinger, Hendrie. Emotional Intelligence at Work. San Francisco: JosseyBass, 1997.
Williams, Theo Stephan. Creative Utopia: 12 Ways to Realize Total
Creativity. Cincinnati: F&W Publications, 2002
United States Department of Labor. Occupational Outlook Handbook.
2004-05 ed. Lincolnwood, Illinois: NTC/Contemporary Publishing
Co., published annually.

(06)Author IDG Pricing 3/3/05 3:13 PM Page 193

About the Author

heo Stephan Williams is the founder of Real Art Design
Group, Inc., an award-winning, full-service graphic design
firm whose international client base includes Universal Studios
Hollywood, the Walt Disney Company, and General Motors.The
author of The Streetwise Guide to Freelance Graphic Design and
Illustration, Pricing, Estimating & Budgeting for Graphic Designers and
Creative Utopia: 12 Ways To Realize Total Creativity, she has taught
many college courses in design theory.After founding an organic
ranch and specialty-food company with her husband Joel, her
career has transcended to interior design, creating original patterns that are being manufactured into carpets and other textiles
in Nepal. Contact her at theo@globalgardensgifts.com.

(06)Author IDG Pricing 3/3/05 3:13 PM Page 194

(07)Index/AW IDG Pricing 3/3/05 3:14 PM Page 195

Index

accountants, 5–8, 129
accounting terms, 5–8
American Marketing
Association (AMA), 18
American Society of
Interior Designers
(ASID), 9, 18
arbitrators, 111–112, 113
Aullwood Audubon Center,
50–52
awards, 49
bartering, 46, 79–80, 99, 125
bids, 23, 32
billable/nonbillable hours,
13–14, 127
billing protocol, 55–58
billing, quick, 78
billing rates, documentation
for, 107
body language, 151
brand definition, 145
brokering, 71–73
Bruck, Eva Doman, 153
budgets, 31–39
asking for, 20
burnout, 67, 90, 104, 107

Business and Legal Forms for
Interior Designers
(Crawford and Bruck),
4, 153
contractors/vendors and,
135
cost-conscious design and,
117–123
cost control/time management and, 125–127
educating clients and,
123–124
estimates and, 82, 83,
124–125
fitting pricing to, 124–125
going over, 106–107
managing project, 101
not getting paid, 36–38
office managers and,
127–128
Painter interview on, 51
for presentations, 94–95
RFPs (Request for
Proposal) and, 93
rose-colored glasses and,
2–3

The Interior Designer’s Guide to P RICING, E STIMATING, and B UDGETING

■

196

(07)Index/AW IDG Pricing 3/3/05 3:14 PM Page 196

too small, 33–39
traffic managers and,
128–130
trust and, 32
Carillon Historic Park, 52
case studies
France interview on negotiating, 140–142
Painter interview on design
for nonprofit entities, 50–52
RFP (Request for Proposal),
94–95
Schmitz interview on perfectionism/time management,
114–116
Taddey interview on error
management, 68–70
Wong interview on feng shui
consulting, 28–30
certified public accountant
(CPA), 5
Chamber of Commerce, 19
change orders, 53–55, 58,
68–69, 89, 101, 153
client approval form, 187–189
clients as business partners, 64,
68
collaboration, 152
commercial vs. residential niche,
19–20, 28
communication, 109–110, 116,
149–150
collaboration and, 152
Maslow’s hierarchy of needs
theory and, 152
nonverbal, 151
politics and, 152
role-playing and, 151–152
successful, 146–150, 150–151
competitions, design, 49
comprehensive production
schedule form, 165–167

computers, 56, 57, 90. See also
e-mail; Internet
confrontation, 137
contract managers. See traffic
managers
contract summary sheet form,
185–186
cost-conscious design, 117–123
cost control, 122, 125
Crawford,Tad, 4, 153
creative development fees, 89
creative sketches, 94
credit, design, 43, 46, 47
credit information, 38
current events, 41
day planners, 59–60
deadlines, 67, 90, 103
designer-client agreement for
commercial project form,
180–184
designer-client agreement for
residential project form,
174–179
design firms, 21
Design Works Studio, 140
disability insurance, 42
discipline, 101–102, 121
dot-coms, 36–38
draw, ability to, 69
educating clients, 86, 123–124
educational opportunities, 121
e-mail, 116, 149, 151. See also
computers; Internet
employees
communication and, 146–148
hiring, 41
mistakes and, 56
as salespeople, 131
use of CPA and, 5
work process and, 63

(07)Index/AW IDG Pricing 3/3/05 3:14 PM Page 197

equipment, 23, 26, 27, 41, 122
error management, case study
interview on, 68–70
errors. See mistakes
estimate/confirmation of
assignment form, 153
estimates vs. proposals, 95–97
estimating, 81–91
budgets, 124–125
checklist for, 85
communication and, 110
contractors/vendors and,
135–136
negotiation and, 131–132
preliminary estimates, 82, 83
preparing an estimate, 83–87
process of, 88–91
questions to ask when, 84
range/“not-to-exceed”
estimates, 87–88
rose-colored glasses and, 2–3
time and, 107–109
time assessment and, 105, 106
traffic managers and, 130
variables in, 91
what is an estimate, 81–83
worksheets, 84, 153
ethics, 58
expense logs, 107
expenses, fixed/unfixed, 5–8,
13, 14, 15, 26, 27

Graphic Artists Guild, 16, 153
Handbook of Pricing and Ethical
Guidelines (Graphic Artists
Guild), 16, 153
House of France, 140

■

idea boards, 118–119
incentive fee program, 141

I NDEX

Fabelo, John, 51
failure, reasons for business, 2
feng shui, 28–30
Feng Shui Dos and Taboos® series
(Wong), 28
file transfer protocol (FTP), 22
form(s), 4, 153–189
for accountability, 107
change order, 53, 55, 153, 173
client approval, 187–189

comprehensive production
schedule, 165–167, 165–167
contract summary sheet,
185–186
cost control and, 125
designer-client agreement for
commercial project,
180–184
designer-client agreement for
residential project, 174–179
estimate/confirmation of
assignment, 153
estimating worksheet, 153
importance of, 101
invoice, 153
overtime-approval, 127
project expense ledger, 153
project mission statement, 153
project plan and budget,
154–161
proposal, 162–164
purchase log, 170–171
purchase order, 172
resources for developing, 153
time sheet, 153, 168–169
foundation for students,
creating, 146
France, Kimberly, 140–142
freelancing, 9, 11–12, 21–22, 25,
104
full service, 11–12, 22
fundraiser, 57

197

The Interior Designer’s Guide to P RICING, E STIMATING, and B UDGETING

■

198

(07)Index/AW IDG Pricing 3/3/05 3:14 PM Page 198

income/salary, 7–8
in-house services, 84
insurance, 42
Interior Design Society (IDS),
18
Internet, 22, 87, 123. See also
computers; e-mail;
Web sites
interns
for deliveries, 103
profit and, 8–9
proposals and, 97
invoice, 153
IRS (Internal Revenue Service),
46, 103
job-jacket system, 65, 105
junior designers, 25, 140
“key-man” insurance, 42
Kinko’s, 98
Krueger, Charity, 51
lawsuits, 112, 113
Lorenz Williams, Inc., 50, 51,
51–52
Madden, Kathy, 59–60
management fees, 74–75
manufacturers
freelancers and, 22
negotiating and, 136
nonprofit clients and, 35
overruns and, 119
pro bono work and, 47
rush charges and, 102
Marie S. Aull Education Center,
50–52
marketing consultant, 146
marketing person, strategic. See
sales-development person
markups, 71–73, 91

Maslow’s hierarchy of needs
theory, 152
mediators, 111
meetings, 116, 119–120, 149
mileage expenses, 103
mistakes
billing protocol and, 55–58
estimating and, 88
taking responsibility for, 56,
58, 110
what to do when client is
wrong, 110–113, 116
Monster.com, 8
Myers-Briggs workshop, 148
National Aviation Hall of Fame,
52
National Home Furnishings
Association, 18
natural disasters, 42
negotiating, 131–142
case study, 140–142
discussing rates/fees, 133–135
rewards/repeat clients and,
138–139
win-win, 135–138
networking, 23, 31
office managers and, 128
pro bono work and, 45
value rating and, 43
nonprofit entities
billing protocol and, 57
Painter interview and, 50–52
pro bono work and, 44, 45,
46
small budgets and, 34–35
no, saying, 33
office managers, 127–129, 146
outside costs, 84
outside suppliers
communication and, 146

(07)Index/AW IDG Pricing 3/3/05 3:14 PM Page 199

estimating and, 84, 89,
108–109
overages and, 126
traffic managers and, 130
current events and, 41
defined, 4–5
equipment and, 23
fixed expenses and, 6
hourly rates and, 8–9
personal accidents and,
42
pricing and, 12, 13, 14
See also subcontractors;
vendors, overhead
overruns, 119
overtime, 89, 127

I NDEX
■

paper reps, 98
PDAs (personal data assistants),
60
perfectionism, 105–106,
114–116, 147
per-project pricing, 78–79
personal accidents, 42
personal manager, 68
per-task pricing, 22
politics, 152
portfolios
budgets and, 33, 125
cost-conscious design and,
121
pro bono work and, 45
proposals and, 97
value rating and, 42, 43
positioning. See “smart firm”
positioning
presentations
budgets for, 94–95
cost-conscious design and,
118–119
negotiation and, 132–133
Wong interview on, 30

pricing
bartering, 79–80
brokering, 71–73
budgets and, 32, 35–36,
124–125
communication and, 152
consistency in, 48
for estimates, 89
factors affecting, 22–23, 31
flexibility in, 80
France interview on,
140–142
hourly rates, 8–9, 11–20,
21–27, 133
management fees, 74–75
markups, 73–74
negotiating, 133–135
on lowering, 59
overhead and, 4–5, 6
per-project, 78–79
profit and, 4
proposals and, 98
on quality and, 27
quick billing, 78
retainers, 77–78
rose-colored glasses and, 2–3
square-footage rates, 75–77
Wong interview on, 28–29,
30
See also value rating
principals, of design firms, 25
pro bono work, 44–47
procrastination, 104, 147
profit
brokering and, 71
communication and, 152
full-service firms and, 22
interns and, 8–9
markups and, 74
need for, 2
negotiating and, 139
pricing and, 4, 12, 13, 14

199

The Interior Designer’s Guide to P RICING, E STIMATING, and B UDGETING

■

200

(07)Index/AW IDG Pricing 3/3/05 3:14 PM Page 200

project management and, 101,
107
rush charges and, 89, 126
time sheets and, 126
project expense ledger, 153
project management, 63–67, 69,
88, 101–105, 107, 125,
126–127
project-management fee, 73
project mission statement, 153
project plan and budget form,
154–161
promotions
competition and, 49
Painter interview and, 51
pro bono work and, 46
small budgets and, 38
value rating and, 42–43
See also publicity; “smart firm”
positioning
proposals, 93–99, 162–164
publicity, 146. See also
promotions
public relations consultant, 146
punch lists, 75, 129, 130
purchase log form, 170–171
purchase orders, 122, 126, 172
purchasing, 116
quick billing, 78
range/“not-to-exceed”
estimates, 87–88
recommendation, letters of, 132
recorders, using, 33, 152
references, 99
referrals, 48, 58
repeat clients, 48, 49, 138–139
Request for Proposal (RFP).
See proposals
residential vs. commercial niche,
19–20, 28

retainers, 77–78
retreats, staff, 148
revisions. See change orders
“revisions allowance,” 53
risks, 137
role-playing, 151–152
rush charges, 89, 102–103, 126
sales by user group chart, 145
sales-development person,
144–145. See also “smart
firm” positioning
schedules, project, 61, 62, 67,
102–104
accepting tight, 90
traffic managers and, 129, 130
Schmitz, Lisa, 114–116
scholarship program, 146
senior designers, 25, 140
shaking hands, 150–151
“smart firm” positioning,
143–152
square-footage rates, 75–77
studio/office rent, 9
studio, one- to two-person, 21
subcontractors
brokering and, 71–73
change orders and, 58, 68
cost-conscious design and,
118, 121
educating clients and, 124
markups and, 74
mediators and, 111
negotiating and, 133, 135–136
pro bono work and, 47
small budgets and, 33–34
traffic managers and, 129, 130
See also outside suppliers;
vendors
Taddey + Karlin, 68
Taddey, Shawn, 68–70

(07)Index/AW IDG Pricing 3/3/05 3:14 PM Page 201

taxes, 5, 7, 46
TBD (to be determined), 85
technology
billing protocol and, 57
equipment and, 122
software, 121
Wong interview on, 29
telephone calls, 67, 149
testimonials, 99
time
estimating and, 107–109
management, 59–60, 67, 69,
105, 114–116
meeting, 119–120
time sheets
controlling costs and, 122, 126
as documentation, 107
form for, 153, 168–169
Schmitz interview on, 115
Taddey interview on, 69
time management tips and, 67
trade. See bartering
traffic managers, 128–130
U.S. Bureau of Labor Statistics,
8, 9
value rating, 17–19, 20, 25,
41–52
competition and, 47–49
current events and, 41–42

fitting estimate to budgets
and, 124
full-service firms and, 22
markups and, 74
Painter interview and, 50–52
pro bono work and, 44–47
self-promotion and, 42–43
small budgets and, 35
vendors
brokering and, 72
communication and, 148–149
markups and, 91
mistakes and, 111
negotiating and, 133, 135–136
overruns and, 119
pro bono work and, 47
project management and, 103
referrals and, 58
traffic managers and, 129
See also outside suppliers;
subcontractors
Web sites, 22, 29. See also
Internet
weekly time sheet, 153
Winds Cafe & Bakery, 79–80
Wire, Chris, 27
Wong, Angi Ma, 28–30
work change order form, 173
work process, 60–64, 65, 70,
123

I NDEX
■

201

(07)Index/AW IDG Pricing 4/12/05 10:55 AM Page 202

Books
from
Allworth
Press

Allworth Press
is an imprint
of Allworth
Communications, Inc.
Selected titles are
listed below.

Business and Legal Forms for Interior Designers
by Tad Crawford and Eva Doman Bruck (paperback, with CD-ROM,
81⁄2 × 11, 240 pages, $29.95)
The Graphic Designer’s Guide to Pricing, Estimating, and Budgeting
by Theo Stephan Williams (paperback, 63⁄4 × 97⁄8, 208 pages, $19.95)
Licensing Art and Design, Revised Edition
by Caryn R. Leland (paperback, 6 × 9, 128 pages, $16.95)
The Real Business of Web Design
by John Waters (paperback, 6 × 9, 256 pages, $19.95)
Creating the Perfect Design Brief: How to Manage Design
for Strategic Advantage
by Peter L. Phillips (paperback, 6 × 9, 208 pages, $29.95)
Starting Your Career As a Freelance Illustrator or Graphic Designer,
Revised Edition
by Michael Fleishman (paperback, 6 × 9, 272 pages, $19.95)
How to Grow as a Graphic Designer
by Catharine Fishel (paperback, 6 × 9, 256 pages, $19.95)
The Graphic Designer’s and Illustrator’s Guide to
Marketing and Promotion
by Maria Piscopo (paperback, 6 × 9, 224 pages, $19.95)
Careers by Design: A Business Guide for Graphic Designers,
Third Edition
by Roz Goldfarb (paperback, 6 × 9, 240 pages, $19.95)
AIGA Professional Practices in Graphic Design: The American
Institute of Graphic Arts
edited by Tad Crawford (paperback, 63⁄4 × 97⁄8, 320 pages, $24.95)
Please write to request our free catalog. To order by credit card, call 1-800-491-2808 or send a check
or money order to Allworth Press, 10 East 23rd Street, Suite 510, New York, NY 10010. Include $5
for shipping and handling for the first book ordered and $1 for each additional book. Ten dollars plus
$1 for each additional book if ordering from Canada. New York State residents must add sales tax.
To see our complete catalog on the World Wide Web, or to order online, you can find us at
www.allworth.com.

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : Yes
Create Date                     : 2009:06:23 18:19:37+02:00
Creator                         : pdfsam-console (Ver. 2.0.5e)
Modify Date                     : 2014:07:31 02:53:13+05:30
Has XFA                         : No
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 5.4-c005 78.147326, 2012/08/23-13:03:03
Creator Tool                    : pdfsam-console (Ver. 2.0.5e)
Metadata Date                   : 2014:07:31 02:53:13+05:30
Producer                        : iText 2.1.6 by 1T3XT
Document ID                     : uuid:170acf53-b843-404e-9886-6d0df4976f17
Instance ID                     : uuid:039a40fc-52ac-403f-b72e-67ac9d718cf6
Format                          : application/pdf
Page Count                      : 209

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

The Interior Designers Guide To Pricing Estimating And Budgeting

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation